JP2022111493A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: When a start lever provided for a slot machine is operated, a lottery of a combination is performed inside and a reel visible via a display window starts rotating. When the stop switch is operated, a reel corresponding to each stop switch stops. In the slot machine, a normal section and an advantageous section are managed by a main controller. The advantageous section is composed of a chance mode and a notification mode. When transferring from the notification mode to the normal section, a termination screen notifying that the advantageous section is over in a first round game of the normal section is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

A slot machine is an example of a gaming machine that rotates and then stops a plurality of reels. In the slot machine, a plurality of symbols are provided on the outer peripheral portion of each reel, and a part of the symbols provided to each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. Then, when the player inserts medals, an effective line is set, and after that, the player operates the start lever to play a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") combination, a small combination, or a small combination inside the slot machine. A lottery for a combination such as a replay is performed and each reel starts to rotate, and by operating a stop switch after each reel starts to rotate, the reels are sequentially stopped and one game ends. When all the reels stop rotating and the combination of the winning combination and the corresponding symbols on the active line stops, the player wins, and the player is given the privilege of paying out medals, the privilege of changing the game state, etc. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

In recent years, as a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the BB state that shifts to when a BB prize is established, an assist that informs the operation order of the stop switch for establishing a predetermined prize when a predetermined winning combination is won. Some have a time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state.

JP-A-2002-355364

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.

The above problem is not limited to the slot machine as exemplified above, but also applies to other game machines that cyclically display a plurality of patterns and then terminate the cyclical display based on the operation of the stop operation means. It is a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.

In the invention according to claim 1, a plurality of cyclic display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of patterns, a start operation means operated to start the cyclic display of the patterns, a lottery means for performing a lottery for a winning combination, A plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the symbols, and the winning symbols corresponding to the winning roles won in the lottery for the roles form a predetermined combination and stop at effective positions. Based on this, in a gaming machine equipped with a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege to a player when a prize is established, as a game state, an advantageous state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be operated; A normal state in which the instruction function does not operate, and the advantageous state includes a first game mode and a second game mode in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode. Further, when the second game mode is shifted to the normal state, an end screen for notifying that the advantageous state is over is displayed at the first game in the normal state. do.

It is possible to improve the game interest.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to one embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is closed; 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. Rear view of the front door. The front view of a housing|casing. The figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through a display window; Explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. A block diagram of a slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing; The flowchart which shows a lottery process. The figure which shows an example of the lottery table in a three-card game. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a two-card game. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; Flowchart showing a pseudo-game determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing rotation start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 6 is a flowchart showing migration preparation processing; Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game section. 4 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in a normal section; A flowchart showing a game section process in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode. 6 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing a slide table used in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing a slide table used in a pseudo-game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo-game. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. 9 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing effect determination processing in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing effect execution processing in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process in the display control device; (a) A diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo-game flag storage area in the third embodiment, (b) A diagram showing the configuration of the header. 4 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 3; FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is closed according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 4 is a flowchart showing stop control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing; 4 is a flowchart showing menu processing; 4 is a flowchart showing standby processing; 4 is a flowchart showing start command waiting processing. 4 is a flowchart showing effect determination processing. 10 is a flowchart showing pressing effect processing; 4 is a flowchart showing result display processing; Flowchart showing a game section process in the chance mode in the fifth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the area lottery process in alerting|reporting mode. The flowchart which shows the game section process in alerting|reporting mode. 4 is a flowchart showing section command processing in the notification mode; 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in the notification mode; 4 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and chance mode; 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in a normal section; 4 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section; 4 is a flowchart showing all reel stop completion command processing in a normal section. 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing in chance mode. The figure which shows an example of the display mode displayed on an auxiliary|assistant display part.

(First embodiment)

An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 480 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulses), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=480 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a "cherry" symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), a "bell" symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), and " Red 7" symbol (e.g., 16th on the left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 15th on the left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (e.g., 14th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols, such as the 11th symbol on the left reel 32L) and the "White 7" symbol (eg, the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of 5 combination lines are set so as to connect positions where these 9 symbols can be visually recognized, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in crossing in the diagonal direction. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), as a horizontal combination line, an upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A connecting middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. Further, as a combination line in the diagonal direction, a right-downward line L4 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, and the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M. A rightward rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R is set. Then, when the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line, as a result of establishment of a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or the game state is shifted. It is designed to grant benefits that

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as the active line. The four combined lines of the upper line L1, the lower line L3, the downward-sloping line L4, and the upward-sloping line L5 are never regarded as valid lines.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination of symbols and a benefit given when winning.

BB1 winning and BB2 winning are examples of state transition winning in which only game state transition is performed.

When the "red 7" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, BB1 wins. When the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the BB2 win is achieved. When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state.

A replay win is given as a win with a replay privilege that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals.

When the "replay" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the replay wins.

The small prizes for which medals are paid out include a watermelon prize, a cherry prize, a bell prize, and a compensation prize.

When the "watermelon" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, three medals are paid out as a watermelon winning prize. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a cherry win.

When the "Bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on any combination line, nine medals are paid out as a bell prize. More specifically, in addition to the case where the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the middle line L2, the "bell" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the upper line L1. When a combination of different symbols stops on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell prize. Combinations of patterns that look like winning bells include, for example, a combination of a "red 7" pattern, a "star" pattern, and a "star" pattern, and a combination of a "BAR" pattern, a "cherry" pattern, and a "BAR" pattern. be. In addition, although the details of the combination of winning symbols are omitted, one medal is paid out when the compensating combination winning is established.

In the following description, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB2 pattern combination is a combination of BB2 winning patterns, that is, a combination of "Red 7" pattern, "Red 7" pattern and "White 7" pattern. Also, the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to each winning are also called winning symbols. For example, the BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at once, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61, and a payout display section for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning. A number display section 62 is also provided. In addition, a section indicator 66 indicating a game section is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 62 . Although the display units 60 to 62 and section display 66 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, there are reel units 31 (more specifically, reel index sensors that individually detect that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, credit insertion detection sensors 56a to 58a for individually detecting the operation of each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting the operation of the settlement switch 59, and a reset detection for detecting the operation of the reset switch 72. Various sensors such as a sensor 72a and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected. The data is output to the CPU 102 via.

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a section display 66, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected to the input/output port 104. connected through

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, and includes a substrate integrated with CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these. After receiving a signal from the main control device 101 , the display control device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. The various display units 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

The above-described CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flow charts of FIGS. 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing , a state information storage area 106c for storing game states, and a section information storage area 106d for storing game sections.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36. FIG.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In power failure processing, the value of the stack pointer of CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stepping motors, which are the respective spinning drum drive motors, are driven, and in order to stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding stepping motors are driven. Stepping motor control processing such as applying a brake to the motor is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 9) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S111, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62 and display corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S112, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step S113, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11 .

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not replay winning has been established in the previous game. When the replay winning has been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . That is, when a replay win is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If the replay winning has not been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing. If it has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state, and an abnormality occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed. If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S206. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S207, an effective line setting process for setting the middle line L1 as an effective line is performed, and in step S208, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, lottery processing in step S209, rotation initialization processing in step S210, waiting processing for 4.1 seconds in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, game section processing in step S214, and step S215. BB state processing is executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S209 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance. , which probability of winning the internal process is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 13 is a lottery table selected in the "setting 3" three-card game, and FIG. 14 is a lottery table selected in the "setting 3" two-card game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=5, in step S306, the middle right and left bell winning flags indicating that the bell, the compensation combination 2, and the compensation combination 4 are won are set in the winning flag storage area 106a. do.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 has been won or the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 has been won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is not the corresponding selection flag. It is reset after the game is finished (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in a state where the BB1 winning flag or BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set. Do not set flags. Therefore, for example, if BB2 is won in a two-card game and a three-card game is played with the BB2 winning flag carried over, BB1 is not won.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, in a three-card game, when the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the left and right bell, the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/9.0, and the probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50. The odds of that happening are about 1/12. In the three-card game, the event of winning the one-card role and the event of winning the BB2 do not occur.

In a two-card game, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 14 is used to determine the winning combination, the probability of winning the replay is about 1/7.3, left center right bell, left right center bell, middle left right bell. , The probability of winning the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/16000. The probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50. is about 1/1.9, and the probability of winning BB2 is about 1/4.0. In the two-card game, the event of winning BB1 does not occur.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and section lottery processing relating to the transition of the game section is performed. In step S<b>310 , a lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps the various results performed in the lottery process, specifically, the results of the win/loss determination of the winning combination and the lottery results in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command is transmitted, the lottery process is terminated.

When the lottery process ends, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, rotation initialization process is performed in step S210. The RAM 106 is provided with a motor control storage area for storing information used for drive control of the stepping motor, and the rotation initialization process performs a process of initializing the motor control storage area. In step S211, a 4.1-second elapsed waiting process is performed. In the 4.1-second elapsed waiting process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel started spinning in the previous game. If not, it waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and the 4.1-second elapse waiting process ends. Since the 4.1-second elapsed waiting process is performed, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game (hereinafter also referred to as "this game") in which a privilege such as medal payout is given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops in one game round, a pseudo game is provided. Games may be played. In the following, in order to facilitate understanding, the reel control processing in the case where no pseudo game is performed, that is, when only the main game is performed will be described.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo-game determination process for determining whether or not to perform a pseudo-game is performed. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the process proceeds to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. That is, in the processing in step S607, only the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained, and the drive control of the stepping motor is not performed. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing described above based on the obtained rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the rotation start process, acceleration is started in the order of the left reel 32L→middle reel 32M→right reel 32R.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. If the stop information is not set, the process advances to step S404 to perform stop information setting processing for setting the stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. It should be noted that, in step S404, the stop information for the reel stop control in this game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is only set, and even if a pseudo game is performed, the reel stop in the pseudo game Stop information for control (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-game stop information") is not set. At step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and command transmission processing 1 is performed at step S406.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo-game rotation start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotation in the pseudo-game. In step S702, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game is to be played is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the pseudo-game rotation start command is cleared at step S703, and the rotation start command is set at step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate in this game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo-game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not there is a reel being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. . In the following step S409, command transmission processing 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S901. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S902 and a stop-allowed command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated at a constant speed in this game by receiving the stop enable command. Further, in step S902, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44, the players are notified that a stop command can be generated in the game. After that, the command transmission process 2 ends.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S410 to perform the stop control process.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S1001. When a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 1009, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is obtained. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1106 and a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 grasps which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command and which reel is to be stopped. Also, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command is issued is extinguished to inform the player that the stop command cannot be issued in the game. In the following step S1107, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S1107, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S1108, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set, and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, stop position determination processing is terminated after performing stop information change processing in step S1110.

Here, the stop information change process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information change process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, when any of the left-center-right bell, left-right-center bell, middle-left-right bell, middle-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell is won (see FIG. 13), a stop command is issued. Stop information change processing is performed to change the winning mode established by the order of operation of the generated stop switches 42-44.

For example, when the left, middle, and right bells are won, if the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in the operation order, the bell prize is established, so that the stop is made in another operation order. The stop information is changed so that if the switches 42 to 44 are operated, the compensation combination 1 winning prize or the compensation combination 4 winning prize is established. The same applies to the left-right middle bell, middle left-right bell, middle right-left bell, right middle-left bell, and right-left middle bell. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order corresponding to the name of the winning combination, the bell wins. is established, the stop information is changed so that when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the compensation combination winning corresponding to the winning combination is established. In the following description, the left-center-right bell, left-right center-bell, center-left-right bell, center-right-left bell, right-center-left bell, and right-left-center bell are also collectively referred to as "push order" or "push order bell".

Incidentally, in the slot machine 10, when a replay is won by the stop information setting process and the stop information change process, the replay win is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the correct operation order, the bell prize is established regardless of the operation timing, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the incorrect operation timing, the operation timing is established. Regardless, the compensation role winning prize is established. In the case of winning the one-piece combination, the compensating combination winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the watermelon is won, when the cherry is won, when the BB1 is won, and when the BB2 is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 must be operated aiming at the winning pattern, that is, at a predetermined timing. corresponding prize will be established.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S1008 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the stopping of the reels is not performed in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop pattern number. stop.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012 and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. When all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S1014 to determine whether or not an instruction monitor, which will be described later, is being displayed. If the instruction monitor is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, this process is terminated after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S1016 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, first, a payout determination process is performed. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If the winning has not been established, the payout determination process is terminated as it is, and if the winning has been established, the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. determine whether or not there is When the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the number of payouts corresponding to the condition device are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106, and the payout determination process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is transmitted so that the display control device 81 can grasp the conditional device that won in the current game round.

When the winning result command is transmitted, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay winning has been established based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. When the regame win is not established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when the regame win is established, the regame setting processing is performed and the medal payout processing is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process S204 described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed.

Next, the game section processing of step S214 will be described later, and the BB state processing of step S215 will be described.

In the BB state processing, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the BB state. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is set. If none of the BB winning flags is set, a state command is transmitted to the display control device 81, and the BB state processing ends. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and is set in the state information storage area 106c. Sends the configured flags and the corresponding status commands.

When any of the BB winning flags is set, it is determined whether or not the corresponding BB winning has been established based on the conditions set in the previous payout determination processing. When the corresponding BB winning has not been established, a state command is transmitted and the BB state processing is terminated. When the corresponding BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if the BB1 winning has been established, the BB1 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c. When the BB2 winning has been established, the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c. After that, the status command is sent and the BB status processing is terminated.

When the current gaming state is the BB state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining BB game number counter, and it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining BB game number counter has become zero. If the value of the remaining BB game number counter is not 0, the BB state processing is terminated after transmitting the state command. When the value of the remaining BB game number counter becomes 0, it means that the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied, so the BB setting flag is cleared. After that, the status command is sent and the BB status processing is terminated.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the game state becomes the BB state until 30 games are played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only 3-card games are possible, and a compensating combination win is established in which a 1-coin combination is always won and 1 medal is paid out. Therefore, when the player shifts to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player reduces the owned medals by 60 (=(3−1)×30) until the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only a two-card game is possible, and a compensating combination win is established in which a one-coin combination is always won and one medal is paid out. Therefore, when the player shifts to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player reduces the owned medals by 30 (=(2−1)×30) until the BB state ends.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages two types of game states, a normal state and a BB state, and two types of game sections, a normal section and an advantageous section. there is

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the transition of the game section.

A normal section is a game section in which a transition lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous section. In the normal section, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell is won. Therefore, in the normal section, a reduction of approximately 0.95 medals is expected for each game played in the case of a 2-card game, and approximately 0.91 medals are expected to be lost in the case of a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected. If the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won, the game section shifts to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified when the pressing order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section in that the operation order can be notified. The advantageous section consists of two game modes, a chance mode and a notification mode. When winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. When 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section, and when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. More specifically, the case where the difference number of medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400 is the case where the increased number of medals possessed by the player in the advantageous section reaches 2400 without becoming 0. This is a case in which the number of medals to be owned reaches 2400 from the reference point when the number of possessed medals of the player decreases the most.

The chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the notification mode. The chance mode ends when the transfer lottery is won and when the game is played a predetermined number of times under the chance mode. When the chance mode ends, the system shifts to the notification mode. In the chance mode, similarly to the normal section, when the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. Therefore, in the chance mode, a decrease of about 0.95 medals is expected for each game played in a two-card game, and a decrease of about 0.91 medals is expected in each game played in a three-card game. A decrease in medals is expected.

The notification mode is a game mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 capable of establishing a bell winning prize when winning the bell in the order of pressing is notified in the case of a three-card game. Therefore, in the notification mode, it is expected that about 0.95 medals will be reduced for each game played in the case of a two-card game, while about 3.5 medals will be lost in the case of a three-card game. An increase in the number of medals is expected. The notification mode ends when the number of net increase in medals reaches a predetermined number under the notification mode. When the notification mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the normal section shifts.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 has a game property of increasing owned medals by playing a three-card game in the notification mode.

Various processes performed by the main controller 101 when managing game sections will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 25 and subsequent figures. For easy understanding, various processes performed by the main controller 101 in each game section will be individually described.

First, the processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the winning combination is determined in the lottery process (step S309, see FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether or not a winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether or not the winning flag has been set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the event of winning BB2 does not occur in the three-card game. Therefore, when the set winning flag is only the BB2 winning flag, it is determined that the winning flag is not set in the current game, and when the winning flag other than the BB2 winning flag is set. , it is determined that the winning flag has been set in the current game. If the winning flag has been set in the current game, the transition flag is set at step S1304, the section indicator 66 is turned ON at step S1305, and this processing ends. If the current game is a two-card game, if the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag is set but not set in the current game, the processing is terminated as it is. do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the transition lottery has been won in the current game. In such a case, the advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. At step S1403, the game interval flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to an advantage flag, and at step S1404, 0 is set to the interval game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In the subsequent step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the interval information storage area 106d. In step S1407, 0 is set to the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d, and in step S1408, 0 is set to the difference number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, a section command is transmitted in step S1409, and this processing ends. . Here, the section command is various information related to the game section at the end of the game (that is, the game section and game mode of the next game, the number of games played in the advantageous section if it is an advantageous section, and the game played in the game mode number of times, etc.) is transmitted to the display control device 81, and in step S1409, the game interval flag and game mode flag set in the interval information storage area 106d, and the values of various counters. Send interval command.

As described above, when winning any combination in the three-card game in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode in the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the case of "setting 3", if the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag are not carried over, a failure occurs only with a probability of about 1/13, and the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag occurs. If the flag is carried over, the deviation will occur only with a probability of about 1/6.4. Therefore, the normal section ends after a few games if three cards are played. It should be noted that when a two-card game is played, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur regardless of whether the winning combination is successful or not.

Next, processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be described.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the chance mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. Since watermelon and cherry are set as rare combinations in the slot machine 10, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the watermelon winning flag or the cherry winning flag is set. If the rare combination is won, the process advances to step S1503, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, determination is made based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining whether the winning combination is appropriate. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transfer lottery is won, this process is terminated after setting a transfer flag in step S1505, and if the transfer lottery is not won, the process is terminated as it is without setting the transfer flag. If the current game is not the 3-card game but the 2-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, this process is terminated without performing the transition lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1601, end determination processing is performed.

In the end determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, 1 is added to the value of the interval game number counter in step S1701, and it is determined whether or not the value of the interval game number counter has reached 1500 in step S1702. . If the value of the section game number counter is not 1500, the process proceeds to step S1706 to determine whether or not a replay win has been established. If the replay win has not been established, the process advances to step S1707 to perform difference number adjustment processing for changing the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference number adjustment process, the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the subtraction result is added to the difference number counter. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more. If the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, the value of the difference number counter is changed to 0, and then the difference number adjustment processing is terminated. End the adjustment process. The reason why the difference number adjustment process is not performed when a replay win is established is that the result of subtracting the number of medals bet from the number of medals paid out in this game is 0, so it is necessary to perform the difference number adjustment process. because there is no

If it is determined in step S1706 that the replay winning has been established, and if the difference number adjustment processing is performed in step S1707, it is checked in step S1708 whether or not the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400. judge. If the value of the difference number counter is 2400 or less, the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the value of the section game number counter is 1500, or if it is determined that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400 in step S1708, the advantage shown in steps S1703 to S1705 will occur. Section end processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the advantageous section end processing, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1703, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1704. In step S1705, initialization processing is executed when the advantageous section ends. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Returning to the description of the game section process, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing has been performed in the end determination processing of step S1601, so the section command is transmitted in step S1610. Afterwards, this processing is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S1604, and it is determined in step S1605 whether or not the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. Change the existing game mode flag to a notification flag. In step S1609, 120 is set in the net increase number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. After that, in step S1610, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S1607 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S1610, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S1608, and the process proceeds to step S1609. 120 is set in the net increase number counter. After that, in step S1610, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the current game is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, a section command is transmitted in step S1610 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

As described above, from the chance mode, even if the transfer lottery is not won, the game shifts to the notification mode by playing a three-card game corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. A value of 700 is set in the transition game number counter when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, the phenomenon in which the value of the number-of-segment-games counter becomes 1500 in the process of judging the end of the game segment process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) does not occur if three cards are played. In addition, since the expected value of increase/decrease in the number of medals in the chance mode is -0.91 (3-card game) or -0.95 (2-card game), the value of the difference number counter in the end determination process of the game section process does not exceed 2400 (step S1708, see FIG. 21). That is, in the present slot machine 10, when a three-card game is played, the event of ending the advantageous section in the chance mode and shifting to the normal section does not occur.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the winning combination is determined in the lottery process (step S309, see FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S1802 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S1803 to perform an extra lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the addition lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, you will win one of the 30, 50, 100, or 300 extra numbers with a probability of about 1/5, and if you win a cherry, you will win about 3 With a probability of 1, one of the additional numbers of 10, 20, 30, and 50 will be won. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the addition lottery is won, an addition flag is set in step S1805, and an addition command is transmitted in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the add-on lottery and the add-on number to be added to the value of the net increase number counter. In step S1807, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the net increase number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the addition lottery, the processing is terminated without setting the addition flag. If the current game is not the 3-card game but the 2-card game, or if the rare role is not won, this processing is terminated as it is without performing the extra lottery.

Here, specific processing performed in the notification mode in the reel control processing will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S401, pseudo-game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo-game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode in step S501, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is terminated as it is. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the addition flag is set. When the add-on flag is set, that is, when the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, the pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and this process ends. If the add-on flag is not set, that is, if the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is performed to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game in step S505. In the pseudo-game lottery, the winning flag that is set, and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the role, the success or failure determination is performed. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery is won, and if the pseudo-game lottery is not won, this processing is terminated as it is. When the pseudo-game lottery is won, a pseudo-game flag is set in step S504, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the notification mode, a pseudo-game flag is set in the case of winning the additional lottery and the case of winning the pseudo-game lottery, and the pseudo-game is performed in the game round.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In the notification mode, the appearance of the young character walking on the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of remaining payouts until the notification mode ends is displayed on the upper right portion of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In FIG. 31(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is hidden. Then, when the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. In addition, it is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 that 100 sheets will be added. When the pseudo-game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), the left reel 32L starts spinning. At this time, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the appearance of the young character walking on the road and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184 as the notification of the pseudo-game ends. , and it is notified that the pseudo-game has shifted to the main game.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In FIG. 32(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is hidden. Then, when the "red 7" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R do not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. In addition to the notification, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the price is not added. When the pseudo-game ends, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the left reel 32L starts spinning. At this time, in the auxiliary display unit 65, when the pressing order bell is won, the notification that it is a pseudo game is completed, and the operation order that can establish the bell winning and the remaining payout until the end of the notification mode. It is displayed that the number remains 84, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. When the middle left and right bell is won, the operation order of "213" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 32(d).

As described above, in the present slot machine 10, when playing a pseudo game, the game progresses in the order of pseudo game→real game in one game round. Therefore, below, the reel control processing in the pseudo-game will be described in order.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S402, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not performed, the process proceeds to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. In step S403 of the first time, since the stop information is not set, the process advances to step S404 to perform stop information setting processing for setting the stop information. That is, in the present slot machine 10, the stop information for the present game is set after performing the rotation start processing for the pseudo game, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. Thereafter, in step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo-game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S705 and a pseudo-game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process is terminated. Display control device 81, by receiving the pseudo-game rotation start command, to start the auxiliary effect for the pseudo-game shown in FIG. 31 (b) and the like.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the command transmission process 1 is completed in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not there is a reel being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

Here, the instruction monitor is a display unit that notifies the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell winning, and is managed by the main controller 101 . In the present slot machine 10, the payout number display unit 62 has a function as an instruction monitor. For example, if a bell win can be established, "1" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. - 特許庁When the middle, right, left bell is won, "2" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, and when the right, left, middle bell is won, "3" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, When the left and right center bell is won, "4" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, and when the middle left and right bell is won, "5" is displayed on the payout number display part 62, When the right-middle-left bell is won, "6" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. - 特許庁

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the push order bell is won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, the process is terminated as it is without displaying the instruction monitor. That is, in the pseudo-game, even if the winning order of the bell is won, the instruction monitor does not display the operation order that enables the winning of the bell. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, command transmission process 2 is performed in step S409.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S901. When the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S903 and a pseudo-stop-enabled command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 grasps that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated at a constant speed in the pseudo game by receiving the pseudo stop enable command. Further, in step S903, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the respective stop switches 42 to 44, the players are notified that a pseudo stop command can be generated in the pseudo game. After that, the command transmission process 2 ends.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S410 to perform the stop control process.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001. If the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the cancel operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated in the pseudo game has been operated, that is, whether or not a pseudo stop command has been generated. If a pseudo stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S1001. If a pseudo-stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 1009, and stop position determination processing is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reaching symbol is obtained. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, it proceeds to step S1104 and refers to the pseudo-game stop information. In the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, a slip table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the winning of the additional lottery, and a slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning It is stored, and in step S1104, reference is made to the slide table corresponding to the execution trigger of the pseudo-game. Here, the slip table is a table that defines how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are to be slid (rotated) from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated before the reels are stopped. In other words, the slide table is capable of deriving the relationship between the arrival symbol that reaches the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually makes a pseudo stop at the base position. stop data group.

FIG. 33 is a slide table referred to in a pseudo-game based on the additional lottery winning. Symbols with numbers having a sliding number of 0 are symbols that actually come to a pseudo stop in the lower row. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated while the 15th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L stops as it is without slipping, and the 16th "red 7 ” The pattern stops in the middle row. In addition, symbols with sliding numbers other than 0 mean that the reels slide as many times as the number of symbols described. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated while the 11th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the lower stage, the left reel 32L slides by 4 symbols, and the 15th "replay" symbol is displayed. The symbol 16 "red 7" is pseudo-stopped in the middle row as the pseudo-stop is made in the lower row. In this way, in the slide table, the number of slides when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R reach the lower stages are set for each symbol number. In the slide table shown in FIG. 33, regardless of the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is pseudo-stopped in the middle stage.

FIG. 34 is a slide table referred to in a pseudo-game based on pseudo-game lottery winning. In such a sliding table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle, while the 16th "red 7" symbol of the right reel 32R The red 7" symbol will stop at the lower stage instead of the middle stage.

Returning to the description of the stop position determination process, a pseudo stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S1105. By receiving the pseudo-stop command, the display control device 81 grasps which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo-stop command and which reel is to be pseudo-stopped. In addition, in step S1106, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the pseudo stop command is generated, the players are informed that the pseudo stop command cannot be generated in the pseudo game. In step S1107, based on the pseudo-game stop information referred to, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is acquired. After that, in step S1108, the acquired number of slips is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped in the base position is determined. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set, and when the pseudo-game flag is set, the process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1010 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S1012 and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42-44 is being operated, the process stands by. When all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process proceeds to step S1014 to determine whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in the pseudo game, this process is terminated after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. When the pseudo-game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S412, and transition preparation processing is performed to shift to the main game.

In the migration preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, an operation wait timer is set (about 3.0 seconds in this embodiment) in step S1201. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the value of the operation wait timer has reached zero. Note that the subtraction of the value of the operation wait timer is performed in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. If the value of the operation waiting timer has not reached 0, the process returns to step S1202. When it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated in step S1202, and when it is determined that the value of the operation waiting timer has become 0 in step S1203, a flag after the pseudo game is set in step S1204, and this processing exit.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when the transition preparation process is completed, the process returns to step S402 to perform the rotation start process.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 in step S601. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a post-pseudo-game flag indicating that a pseudo-game has been played is set. As described above, when the pseudo-game is performed, since the post-pseudo-game flag is set in the transition preparation process, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the winning order of pressing the bell is won, the process proceeds to step S604, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the winning of the bell is displayed on the instruction monitor. Further, in step S604, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation order command, the display control device 81 displays the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the operation order is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 with a slight delay from the timing at which the operation order is displayed on the instruction monitor.

When the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604, and when it is determined in step S603 that the pressing order bell has not been won, the process advances to step S605 to acquire the delay time. The RAM 106 of the main controller 101 is provided with a delay timer for determining the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is pseudo-stopped. A value (ie, a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in the delay timer. The subtraction of the value of the delay timer is performed in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. In step S606, it waits until the value of the delay timer becomes 0, and when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S607 to start accelerating the reels according to the value of the repetition number counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether or not the post-pseudo-game flag is set. When the post-pseudo-game flag is set, the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared at step S611, the post-pseudo-game flag is cleared at step S612, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information is set. In step S403 after performing a pseudo game, since the stop information has already been set, a negative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. At step S405, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and command transmission processing 1 is performed at step S406. In the command transmission process 1 after the pseudo game is played, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . Upon receiving the rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary effect for this game shown in FIG. 31(d) and the like.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S408 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the push order bell is won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning at step S804 is displayed on the instruction monitor, and this process is terminated. Further, in step S804, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. However, after the pseudo-game is performed, since the operation order has already been displayed on the instruction monitor in the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), the display content of the instruction monitor changes by performing the process of step S804. never do. In other words, the process of step S804 can be said to be a process for displaying the instruction monitor in game rounds in which no pseudo game is performed.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 are the same as those described in the reel control process in this game, so description thereof will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set. If the pseudo-game flag is not set, this process is terminated as it is.

The present slot machine 10 has a configuration in which it is possible to cancel the pseudo game and shift to the main game. Therefore, hereinafter, such a configuration will be specifically described based on the flowchart of FIG. 21 .

When it is determined that the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not a cancel operation to end the pseudo-game has been performed. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1003 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is 3, that is, whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the pseudo-game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the instruction monitor display process described above is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo-game end command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 grasps that the pseudo-game has been canceled by receiving the pseudo-game end command. After that, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007, and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 30 msec in step S1007 is to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary effect for the pseudo-game to the auxiliary effect for the main game.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when the pseudo game is cancelled.

In the notification mode, the appearance of the young character walking on the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of remaining payouts until the notification mode ends is displayed on the upper right portion of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In FIG. 35(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right part of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 cards remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo-game is performed, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, as shown in FIG. and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加At this time, the number of remaining payouts is hidden until the end of the notification mode. If the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, as shown in FIG. Move to this game. At this time, in the auxiliary display section 65, the notification of the fact that it is a pseudo-game ends without notifying the result of the pseudo-game, more specifically whether or not it has been added, and the appearance of the young character walking on the road. , and the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. However, if the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184 and displayed as shown in FIG. 35(c).

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 3, that is, when at least one reel is pseudo-stopped and a cancel operation is performed, the cancel operation is performed. After setting a cancel operation flag indicating that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step 1009, and stop position determination processing is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reel. After that, in step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, it means that the remaining one reel is rotating. Therefore, the process returns to step S1001, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, and the process proceeds to step S1002. . In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag is set. Thereafter, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and stop position determination processing is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. When the value of the reel rotation number counter becomes 0, the process from step S1011 onwards is performed after clearing the cancel operation flag.

As described above, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the main game is started as it is without quasi-stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is in a pseudo-stop state, the main game is started after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S1901, the end determination process described above is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S1901, so the section command was transmitted in step S1908. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

When the current game section is an advantageous section, in step S1903, a net increase number update process for updating the value of the net increase number counter is performed. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter, and the number of medals bet (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is added to the subtraction result. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase number counter has become zero. If the value of the net increase number counter is not 0, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S1908. When the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S1905 to S1907 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S1908 to end this processing. In the advantageous section end processing, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1905, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1906. In step S1907, an initialization process is executed upon completion of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the value of the counter for the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

Here, the gaming properties of the slot machine 10 will be described.

In this slot machine 10, a 2-card game and a 3-card game are possible. However, when a two-card game is played in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur even if a winning combination is won. Further, when a two-card game is played in the advantageous section, if the game mode at that time is the notification mode, even if the winning order of the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. If the game mode of is the chance mode, the transition lottery is not performed. In addition, in the two-card game, while the mode game number counter that triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, the section game number counter that triggers the transition to the normal section is updated (end determination processing , see FIG. 29). Furthermore, in a two-card game, the probability of winning BB2 is about 1/4.0, and if BB2 wins, it is necessary to reduce the owned medals by 30 over 30 games. Therefore, when the 2-card game and the 3-card game are compared, the 3-card game is more advantageous for the player.

In the 3-card game, BB1 is won with a probability of about 1/12, and when BB1 is won, it is necessary to reduce the owned medals by 60 over 30 games. However, when a three-card game is played with the BB2 win flag carried over, the event of winning BB1 does not occur, and the event of winning BB2 does not occur either. Therefore, playing a three-card game with the BB2 winning flag carried over is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, in the following, the game performance when the 3-card game is played with the BB2 winning flag carried over will be described.

In the normal section, when winning any combination in the 3-card game, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/1.2 that a player wins some role, and a probability of about 1/6.4 is that a player loses. Therefore, the normal section can be completed in almost one game by playing a three-card game.

When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the chance mode is started and 700 is set as the transition game number (see FIG. 26).

In the chance mode, when a rare role is won, a lottery for transition to the notification mode is performed. When the transfer lottery is won, the chance mode is transferred to the notification mode. Also, even if the transfer lottery is not won, if 700 3-card games are played under the chance mode, the game shifts to the notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see FIG. 28). In other words, in the slot machine 10, when the normal section is shifted to the chance mode, 700 times has a function as the so-called peak number of times. The advantageous section ends when 1500 games are played and when the difference number reaches 2400 regardless of the game mode at that time. When the notification mode is entered based on reaching the ceiling 700 times, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 800 times. In the notification mode, the operation order is always notified when the pressing order bell is won, so it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 3.5 each time one game is played. Assuming that 800 games can be played in the notification mode, an increase of about 2700 medals can be expected. Therefore, even in the case of shifting to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling, it can be expected that the difference number reaches 2400 and the advantageous section ends before 1500 games are played.

When the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode, 120 is set in the net increase number counter (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. In addition, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the net increase number is to be increased (see FIG. 30). At this time, when winning the extra lottery based on winning the watermelon, any one of 30, 50, 100, 300 is added, and when winning the extra lottery based on the winning of the cherry, 10, 20, 30, 50 is added. is added. Then, when the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the notification mode and the advantageous section are finished and the normal section is started (see FIG. 36).

When winning the extra lottery, a pseudo-game flag is set and a pseudo-game is performed in the game. In the pseudo-game based on the extra lottery win, the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, and the number added to the net increase number counter is informed. In addition, even if the additional lottery is not won, when the pseudo-game lottery is won, the pseudo-game flag is set, and the pseudo-game is performed in the game. In the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning, the "red 7" pattern of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, while the "red 7" pattern of the right reel 32R is pseudo on the middle line L2. It is notified that the net increase number counter will not be added without stopping. These pseudo-games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 . When the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not pseudo-stopped, and the game proceeds as it is, and at least one When the settlement switch 59 is operated while the reels are quasi-stopped, the main game is started after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are quasi-stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A pseudo game is executed when winning the extra lottery. In the pseudo-game, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, and the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Then, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using reels, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, when the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of the pseudo-game, the pseudo-game can be terminated. With such a configuration, the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game can suppress the desire to play when the pseudo-game is started. Become.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a state in which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is finished without stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. With such a configuration, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game cannot be grasped unless the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game. It is possible to encourage

When the pseudo-game is executed, this game is executed after the pseudo-game is finished. With such a configuration, when the pseudo game can be finished as it is without the reels 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stopping, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop at the stage of starting the next game. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of events that are not Further, in such a configuration, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are quasi-stopped or the rotation is restarted. It is possible to proceed to the determination as to whether or not a stop command has been issued, without any delay. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo game to the main game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a state in which at least one reel is quasi-stopped, the quasi-game is terminated after all spinning reels are quasi-stopped. With such a configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop switches 42-44 in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the stop switches 42-44 by operating the settlement switch 59. It is possible to end the pseudo-game without doing.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of the pseudo-game, the subsequent processing is changed depending on the value of the reel rotation counter. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the end mode of the pseudo game according to the situation in which the settlement switch 59 is operated, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest. For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, it is possible to make a configuration in which all rotating reels are always pseudo-stopped. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a concern that the significance of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo-game will be lost. This concern becomes more conspicuous in the case of a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the stop result of symbols in a pseudo-game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. However, if the subsequent processing is configured to change depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

A pseudo-game is performed when winning the extra lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the pseudo-game a game for notifying that the net increase in the number of coins will increase, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the pseudo-game, when the combination of ``red 7'' symbols is quasi-stopped on the middle line L2, it is reported that the net increase number is increased, and the combination of ``red 7'' symbols is not quasi-stopped on the middle line L2. In this case, the configuration is such that the increase in the net increase in the number of sheets is not notified. By adopting such a configuration, the player who wants to receive the notification of the net increase in the number of coins is urged to operate the stop switches 42 to 44, while the player who does not need to receive the notification of the increase in the net increase in the number of coins is made to operate the settlement switch 59. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the stop result of the symbols in the pseudo-game does not directly contribute to the increase in the number of net increase. In this game, you cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts unless you win a prize, but in the pseudo-game, the increase in the number of net additions has already been confirmed by the extra lottery, so the combination of "Red 7" symbols The player will not be disadvantaged even if the ball does not stop on the middle line L2. If the combination of "red 7" symbols does not stop on the medium line L2, it is only not notified that the net increase number will increase. Thus, by making the pseudo-game unrelated to the player's direct profit, it becomes possible to position the pseudo-game as one of the effects in which the player can actively participate, and the operation of the settlement switch 59 This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A pseudo game is performed in the game when winning the extra lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Certainly, it is possible to have a configuration in which a pseudo-game is played in a game different from the game won in the extra lottery. However, in the case of such a configuration, if the player forgets that the player has won a rare role in the game before the pseudo-game is started, the player recognizes the pseudo-game as a so-called fake. There is a concern that the stop switches 42 to 44 may not be operated aiming at the "Red 7" symbol. In addition, if the player wins the rare role in the final game of the notification mode and ends the notification mode without winning the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the player may have suspicions that the additional lottery itself was not performed. is also of concern. On the other hand, if a pseudo-game is performed in the game won in the extra lottery, the flow of the game becomes pseudo-game → main game, so it is possible to solve the above concerns. be.

Even if the player does not win the extra lottery, if the pseudo game lottery is won, the pseudo game is played. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the number of net additions and an opportunity not to be notified of an increase in the number of net additions in the pseudo-game, and to improve the game interest. .

When playing a pseudo game, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that one game has ended when the pseudo-game ends. In addition, even if the pseudo-game shifts to the main game without stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the player will not be able to distinguish between the pseudo-game and the main game. It is possible to avoid.

When a pseudo game is performed in a game in which the pressing order of the bell is won, the operation order in which the winning of the bell can be established is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the above operation order in the pseudo game. In addition, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are pseudo-stopped and before acceleration of the pseudo-stopped reels is started, the operation order is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the above-described operation order in this game, and the bell prize cannot be established.

In game rounds in which no pseudo-game is executed, the operation sequence capable of establishing a bell prize is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R reach a constant speed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the above-described operation order in the game different between the game times in which the pseudo-game is executed and the game times in which the pseudo-game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the operation order is notified before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the timing of notification of the operation order in this game is changed depending on whether or not the pseudo game is executed. By doing so, it is possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo-game ends, the delay time is set based on the random numbers obtained for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the acceleration of the reels is started after waiting for the delay time. With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when shifting to the main game, and in the pseudo game, the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle line L2. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, the symbols "red 7" are not aligned. As a result, it is possible to avoid the fact that the stop roll of the pseudo-game becomes a blind-pushing assist in the subsequent main game.

When notifying the order of operations that can establish a bell prize, in addition to notifying on the auxiliary display unit 65 controlled by the display control device 81, the instruction monitor controlled by the main controller 101 notifies. and Since it is determined by the main control unit 101 whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated can be determined before informing the operation sequence. It is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event that determines whether

It is configured to determine that a pseudo-game cancel operation has been performed when the settlement switch 59 is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally performing a cancel operation. For example, when the start lever 41 is operated after the start of the pseudo-game, it is possible to determine that the cancel operation has been performed. However, in the case of such a configuration, when the player repeatedly hits the start lever 41 when generating the start command, the operation of the start lever 41 after the second time is determined to be a cancel operation, and the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo game. This is because an event may occur in which the pseudo-game ends in spite of this.

When the pseudo game is executed, after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game, stop information for this game is set. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the main game as compared with the configuration in which the stop information for the main game is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

The pseudo-game stop information is configured to be set after the pseudo-stop command is generated. With such a configuration, even if the stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo-game, the time required to determine whether or not the pseudo-stop command has occurred in the pseudo-game is shortened. It becomes possible to plan

On the other hand, if the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, there is a possibility that the time from the occurrence of the pseudo-stop command to the pseudo-stop of the corresponding reel will be delayed. can be considered. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo-game based on an additional lottery winning, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is simulated in the middle row. In the case of a pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning, the 16th "red 7" pattern of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M is pseudo-stopped in the middle regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42-44. , the 16th "red 7" pattern of the right reel 32R is stopped not in the middle stage but in the lower stage. In this way, the stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated. Even so, it is possible to suppress the delay in the time from the generation of the pseudo stop command to the pseudo stop of the corresponding reel.

In the pseudo-game, it is configured such that after slipping up to 19 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the pseudo-stop is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time to set the pseudo-game stop information after the pseudo-stop command is generated, and the time to determine the stop position of the reel based on the pseudo-game stop information. Become. Furthermore, in this game, since the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after the stop command is generated, it is difficult to set the stop information after the stop command is generated. It is necessary to set the stop information before determining whether or not the command has occurred. On the other hand, in the pseudo-game, since the above restrictions are not provided, it is possible to ensure the above-mentioned respective times by adopting a configuration that allows a pseudo-stop after slipping up to 19 symbols.

(Second embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, the number of coins to be added is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of coins to be added may be notified in the present game. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S2001, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106. FIG. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. The drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003 to subtract 1 from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S2002. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S2005 to perform stop information setting processing for setting stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S2007, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process proceeds to step S2009 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. When the current game mode is the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor in step S2103, and this process is terminated. Further, in step S2103, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2010. Thereafter, stop control processing is performed in step S2011, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If no stop command is issued, wait until a stop command is issued. When a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 2202, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, in step S2301, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is obtained from the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation counter. In step S2303, a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. Further, in step S2303, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been issued, the players are notified that the stop command cannot be issued in the game. In the subsequent step S2304, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the present slot machine 10, as the stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbols that have reached the base position are stopped as they are. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the engine is stopped. Therefore, in step S2304, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S2305, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position is determined. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been generated for at least one reel, stop information change processing is performed in step S2307, and then stop position determination processing is terminated. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, if a stop command has been issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S2203 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S2201. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop symbol number. stop.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S2205 and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S2206, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. If all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S2207 to transmit an operation end command to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the processing ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the addition notification effect for notifying the number of additions will be described.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing performed at the start stage of a game round.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if not received, this processing ends. When a lottery result command is received, it progresses to step S2402 and it is determined whether the present game mode is information mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2404, and a lottery for effect execution is performed. In the effect execution lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the type of the won rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, in the effect execution lottery, if the watermelon is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/10, and if the cherry is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/2. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the lottery for effect execution is won. When the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S2406, and this processing is terminated. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S2407 to determine whether or not the addition command has been received. The add-on command is a command transmitted from the main controller 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is transmitted before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. In such a case, an effect flag is set in step S2406, and this processing ends. If no add-on command has been received, the process ends. When the display control device 81 receives the add-on command, the display control device 81 stores the add-on count indicated by the add-on command in the add-on count counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an effect execution process performed during execution of this game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, the process ends. If the effect flag is set, it means that the additional notification effect is executed, so the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If the stop command is not received, it waits until the stop command is received, and if the stop command is received, the value of the stop operation number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set in step S2503. Add 1. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3. If not, in step S2505, a notification sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. and returns to step S2502. When the value of the number-of-stopped-operations counter has reached 3, this process ends after the addition notification process is performed in step S2506.

In the addition notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, it is determined in step S2601 whether or not the addition command has been received, that is, whether or not the addition lottery has been won in the current game round. In the case of the game round in which the additional lottery was won, the CPU waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2602. When the all-reels stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2603 to output a notification sound from the speaker 64 according to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter. After that, in step S2604, it waits until an operation end command is received. When the operation end command is received, the process advances to step S2605 to display on the auxiliary display section 65 the number of additional sheets won in the additional lottery. After that, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the add-on command has not been received, that is, if the add-on lottery has not been won in the current game round, the process proceeds to step S2608 to notify whether or not to output a notification sound. Perform a sound run lottery. In the notification sound execution lottery, the winner is determined based on the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is about one-third. In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the notification sound execution lottery has been won. If the information sound execution lottery is won, the process waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2610. When the all-reel stop completion command is received, the process proceeds to step S2611, and a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. FIG. After that, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and this processing ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, and the effect flag is cleared in step S2607. End this process.

Here, the action of the additional notification effect will be described.

The addition notification performance is performed when winning the addition lottery and when winning the performance execution lottery.

When the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs the first notification sound (for example, the sound of “do”), and outputs two When a stop command based on the generation of the eye stop command is received, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. Then, when a stop command based on the generation of the third stop command is received, after receiving an all reel stop completion command indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, a third notification is made. After receiving an operation end command indicating that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operating state by outputting a sound (for example, the sound of "mi"), the number of additional sheets won in the additional lottery is subsidized. Displayed on the display unit 65 .

When the display control device 81 has not won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs the first notification sound (for example, the sound of “do”), and outputs two When receiving a stop command based on the generation of the eye stop command, it outputs a second notification sound (for example, a “re” sound). When a stop command based on the generation of the third stop command is received, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position when the notification sound execution lottery is won. After receiving the command, a third notification sound (e.g., "mi" sound) is output, and if the notification sound execution lottery is not won, after receiving the all reel stop completion command, a third notification sound (e.g., " "mi" sound) is not output.

As described above, in the additional notification effect, if the additional lottery is won, the flow is the first notification sound output → the second notification sound output → the third notification sound output → the addition number notification, and the addition lottery is won If not, the flow is the first notification sound output→the second notification sound output→the third notification sound output, or the first notification sound output→the second notification sound output. Here, the probability of winning the additional lottery is, for example, in the case of setting 3, about 1/5 for watermelon winning and about 1/3 for cherry winning. The probability of winning the performance execution lottery is about 1/10 if the watermelon is won, and about 1/2 if the cherry is won. Therefore, in the case of watermelon winning, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the addition notification performance is started, the expectation degree of notification of the number of additional coins exceeds 66%. In the case of a cherry winning, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification performance is started, the expectation degree of the notification of the additional number of coins exceeds 40%. Since the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is about 1/3, when the third notification sound output is output, the degree of expectation that the additional number will be notified is further increased than the above ratio. becomes. Since the third notification sound is output after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, the player continues to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command until he/she feels comfortable. can be terminated after

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the stop control process, when the stop pattern number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, whether or not the next stop command is generated in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. It is configured to determine whether or not With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop switches without waiting for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if it is configured to determine whether or not the next stop command is generated without waiting for the reel to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a situation where the reel is not stopped. New problems such as storage may arise. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol numbers of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined, a waiting process of waiting for 100 msec is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to stop the swinging of the reels while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Certainly, when it is determined that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, before determining whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, that is, step S2203 and It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed between step S2204. However, in the case of such a configuration, as the waiting time in the standby process, not only the time when the swinging of the reel converges, but also the time required until the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel becomes the stop symbol number (that is, reel sliding time) must also be considered. Since this slot machine 10 can slide a maximum of four symbols, it is necessary to secure about 179 msec (=1.49×24×5) as a standby time in addition to the time for the swinging of the reels to converge. If the reels are stopped with the sliding number of 3 symbols or less instead of 4 symbols, the waiting time of about 36 msec (=1.49×24×1) or more becomes useless time, and the game is slowed down. It leads to getting lost. On the other hand, when it is configured to perform standby processing after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns. Become.

A standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after it is determined that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started even when the configuration is such that the standby process is performed, and the next game round can be started. It is possible to improve the operability when For example, without providing the process S2206 for determining whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, if the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed after the determination. However, in the case of such a configuration, the timing at which the player ends the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 may be after the end of the waiting process or during the waiting process. , the time required until the next game round can be started will change. Then, if the time required until the next game round can be started changes, even if the player performs a medal insertion operation to start the next game round, an event occurs in which the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability at the time of starting the next game round is lowered.

A standby process of waiting for 100 msec is configured to be performed before the medal payout process is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which a privilege such as medal payout is given in a situation where the swinging of the reels has not stopped. Furthermore, by performing the standby process before the payout determination process performed in the medal payout process, the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process is increased while suppressing the processing configuration from becoming complicated. becomes possible. For example, if it is determined in the payout determination process that a minor winning combination has been established, the waiting process is not performed or waits for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, and a minor winning combination is established in the payout determination process. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed to wait for a predetermined period of time when it is determined that the device is not ready. With such a configuration, the waiting time changes depending on the presence or absence of payout of medals, etc., so it is possible to suppress the delay until the next game round can be started. However, such a configuration complicates the processing configuration, and when the above processing program is applied to other slot machines in which the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small winning combination is different, it is necessary to appropriately change the processing time. This is because the versatility is reduced due to the occurrence of such problems.

A push order bell is provided as a lottery combination, and a stop command can be generated continuously without waiting for the reels to stop, in a configuration that is advantageous to the player when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the notified operation order. It was configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally making a mistake in the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. That is, in a structure in which it is advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the player may unintentionally make a mistake in the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 . Such an event occurs when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, but the stop switch to be operated second in a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop command is not stopped, for example. This is because the stop switch operated thirdly is determined to be the operation for the second stop command without being validated.

If the operation order is being displayed on the instruction monitor, the standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after the operation order is hidden. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process while promptly ending the notification of the operation order by the instruction monitor. This is because the waiting time in the standby process can be shortened by the time required for the processes in steps S2208 and S2209.

In the case of determining whether or not the next stop command is generated without waiting for the reel to stop, for example, while the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, for example, the second stop New problems may occur, such as the reel corresponding to the command not being stopped, or the operation of at least one stop switch not being completed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Then, when the above-described problem occurs, a problem arises in the control performed on the display control device 81 side. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are determined on the side of the main controller 101, the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. In addition to determining whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, it is determined. Then, when the symbol numbers of the reaching symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, an all-reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81, and all the stop switches 42-44 are stopped. is in a non-operated state, an operation end command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . With such a configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control according to the stoppage of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by receiving the all-reel stop completion command, and can issue the operation end command. By receiving this, it becomes possible to perform control according to the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42-44. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The main controller 101 is configured to transmit the operation end command after transmitting the all reel stop completion command. With such a configuration, the display control device 81 performs control according to the stoppage of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and then responds to the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to control. Furthermore, the maximum time required from the determination of the stop position of the reel for which the stop command is generated until the reel actually reaches the stop position is about 179 msec, which is about 179 msec at the maximum due to the slip of four symbols. I can grasp it. On the other hand, the time required until all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main controller 101 side. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the operation end command is transmitted after the all reels stop completion command is transmitted, for example, the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the display control device 81 output the all reels stop completion command. It is possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on reception and the timing.

When it is determined that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated before determining whether or not It is configured to transmit a reel stop completion command. By adopting such a configuration, the deviation between the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the reception of the all reel stop completion command is reduced. becomes possible. Further, when it is determined that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, an operation end command is transmitted before determining whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference between the timing when all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on the reception of the operation end command. becomes possible.

The additional notification performance is configured to progress when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and when the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the display control device displays the additional notification performance. 81 is controlled. In such a configuration, depending on which of the stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the completion of the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 occurs first, the details of the effects prepared with great effort are determined. There is concern about the possibility that one cannot be executed. In order to eliminate such concerns, for example, when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or when all stop switches 42 to 44 are completely operated, a third notification sound is generated. is output, and when the other is generated, an additional notification is executed. However, in such a configuration, the command type received from the main controller 101 does not correspond to the processing content to be executed, so the processing configuration related to the additional notification effect becomes complicated and the storage capacity increases. A new problem may arise.

On the other hand, from the main controller 101, an all-reel stop completion command indicating that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position is transmitted, indicating that all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. By transmitting the operation end command, the display control device 81 can recognize that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped through reception of the all reels stop completion command. , it can be grasped that the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed. Further, since the main controller 101 transmits the operation end command after transmitting the all reels stop completion command, the display control device 81 controls to output the third notification sound based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command. Then, based on the subsequent reception of the operation end command, control may be performed to execute the additional notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

In the additional notification performance, the third notification sound is output from the speaker 64 based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command, and the additional notification is executed by the auxiliary display part 65 based on the reception of the operation end command. In this way, by making the device for executing the effect based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command and the device for executing the effect based on the reception of the operation end command different, the all reels stop completion command is received until the operation end command is received is short, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound.

(Third embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 20, a command for pseudo-game and a command for this game are separately prepared, and a command according to the presence or absence of a pseudo-game flag is displayed by the display control device 81. Although it was configured to transmit to, this configuration will be changed. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo-game flag storage area provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. FIG. The pseudo-game flag storage area consists of 1 byte. In each bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area, the highest 7th bit and the 5th to 0th bits are blank, and the 6th bit has a function as a pseudo-game flag storage bit. . When the main control device 101 sets the pseudo-game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "1", and the pseudo-game flag is cleared (step S611, 17 or step S1004, see FIG. 21), "0" is set to the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area. Therefore, when each bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is arranged from the upper side and the numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number is converted to a hexadecimal number, it becomes 40H (01000000) when the pseudo-game flag is set, When the pseudo-game flag is not set, it becomes 00H (00000000).

Next, command transmission processing 1 in this embodiment will be described. The command transmission process 1 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S406, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a rotation start command or a pseudo game rotation start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701.

Here, the structure of the command will be briefly explained. A command is composed of a header indicating the command type, a body indicating specific contents, and a footer indicating the last information of the command. The header consists of 1 byte, as shown in FIG. 44(b). The function of each bit of the header is as follows. The 7th bit, which is the most significant, has a function as a header identification bit and always stores "1". The 6th bit has a function as a pseudo-game identification bit indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game, the 5th bit is blank, and the 4th to 0th bits indicate the command type. It has a function as a command type storage bit. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, ie, 10000110, and is pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 .

When the rotation start header information is obtained in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702, and pseudo-game determination information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area also has a function as pseudo-game determination information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set i.e. during the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S2702 becomes C6H (11000110), if the pseudo-game flag is not set i.e. during the main game , the addition result in step S2702 is 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2705, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this process ends. It should be noted that in the command transmission process 1, since the body information is not set to the rotation start command (pseudo-game rotation start command), the header and footer indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo-game rotation start command) It is transmitted to the display control device 81 .

Next, command transmission processing 2 in this embodiment will be described. The command transmission process 2 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S409, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a stop enable command or a pseudo stop enable command to the display control device 81. FIG.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, stop enable header information is acquired in step S2801. The stop-enabled header information is 87H, ie, 10000111, and is pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 . In step S2802, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to 87H, which is the stop-enabled header information. As a result, if the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., if it is during the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S2802 becomes C7H (11000111), and if the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., if it is during this game , the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2805, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this processing ends. In the command transmission process 2, since body information is not set in the stop-allowed command (pseudo-stop-allowed command), the header and footer indicating the stop-allowed command (pseudo-stop-allowed command) are displayed. Send to device 81 .

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing stop position determination processing. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S1103, and the pseudo-stop command or stop command is sent to the display control device 81 according to the determination result. sent (see FIG. 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, although it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S2903, regardless of the determination result, the pseudo stop command or stop command in step S2905 Command transmission processing 3 is performed for transmission.

In command transmission processing 3, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, stop header information is acquired in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, ie, 10001000, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 in advance. In step S3002, pseudo-game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to 88H, which is stop header information. As a result, when the pseudo-game flag is set, i.e., when it is in the pseudo-game, the addition result in step S3002 becomes C8H (11001000), and when the pseudo-game flag is not set, i.e., in the case of this game , the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is transmitted to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this process ends. In command transmission processing 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel on which the stop command or pseudo stop command is generated is transmitted as the body information. More specifically, when the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as the body information, and when the reel is the middle reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as the body information, and the reel is the right reel 32R. In this case, 03H is transmitted as body information. These body information are pre-stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 . As a result of the above, in the command transmission process 3, as a stop command (pseudo stop command), a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating a stop reel (pseudo stop reel), and a footer. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Different commands are sent when it is a pseudo game and when it is a main game. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for the display control device 81 to grasp whether it is a pseudo game or a main game.

As a result of the above, the display control device 81 can be made to perform control such as a pseudo-game and an auxiliary performance corresponding to the main game, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, if the command to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game and the command to be transmitted in the case of this game are stored in the ROM 105 in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. It will be done. In addition, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-game when sending a command, there is a concern that the processing configuration will become complicated in addition to the increase in the amount of data accompanying the addition of the determination process. It will happen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the command transmission process 1 or the like, by adding the header information such as the rotation start header information and the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area, it is transmitted to the display control device 81 It was configured to create a header that By adopting such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. Also, in such a configuration, since the created header includes whether or not it is a pseudo-game, the process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo-game becomes unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

The header contains information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 . That is, as a configuration for the display control device 81 to grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game, it is possible to transmit 00H or 40H in the body instead of the header instead of performing the calculation as in this embodiment. is. However, in such a configuration, since the command to be transmitted increases by 1 byte, the command becomes redundant.

A header identification bit, a pseudo-game identification bit, and a command type storage bit are provided in the header, and the header can be accommodated in one byte. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to allow the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header while suppressing command redundancy.

In the header, the pseudo-game identification bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game in a bit that was previously unused, and a command to be sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 becomes redundant. Also, by adding pseudo-game determination information to create header information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game in the header without changing the conventional header configuration. becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the development man-hours of the slot machine 10 .

The pseudo-game flag storage area is composed of 1 byte, which is the same byte as the header, and the bits other than the 6th bit are blank. With such a configuration, when adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, it is possible to avoid changing the value of other bits such as the command type storage bit.

It is configured to create a header using the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area. With such a configuration, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area has a function as information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and a function as information used when creating a header. and can be given. As a result, since it becomes unnecessary to provide a storage area for storing the pseudo-game determination information in the RAM 106, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the pseudo game is performed, but the configuration may be such that only the main game is performed without performing the pseudo game. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to this embodiment.

A production switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and to the left of the medal insertion slot 45 . The effect switch 67 is operated when a pressing effect, which will be described later, is executed, and when a menu screen is called up in a situation in which no game is being played. ing. The selection switch 68 is composed of four switches, ie, an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch for designating up, down, left, and right directions. manipulated. The production switch 67 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are arranged as shown in FIG. , is connected to the display control device 81 .

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S3101, 3 is set in the repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106. FIG. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition number counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is acquired, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the table address for the middle reel 32M is acquired. If the value of the repetition number counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. The drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control processing S107 of the timer interrupt processing based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is obtained in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103 to subtract 1 from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S3102. When the value of the repetition number counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S3105 to perform stop information setting processing for setting stop information. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created in accordance with the result of the win/loss determination, and the created result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, 3 is set in the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106, and in step S3107, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In step S3108, it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is accelerating. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, it waits until the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, the process advances to step S3109 to perform instruction monitor display processing. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, it is determined in step S3201 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S3202 to determine whether or not the pressing order bell is won. If the pressing order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor in step S3203, and this processing ends. Further, in step S3203, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, or if the pressing order bell is not won, the processing is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3110. Thereafter, stop control processing is performed in step S3111, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. If no stop command is issued, wait until a stop command is issued. If a stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 3302, and stop position determination processing is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is obtained from the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S3403, a stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. FIG. In addition, in step S3403, by extinguishing the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated, the players are notified that the stop command cannot be generated in the game. In the following step S3404, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the present slot machine 10, as the stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbols that have reached the base position are stopped as they are. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the engine is stopped. Therefore, in step S3404, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S3405, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S3406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been generated for at least one reel, stop information change processing is performed in step S3407, and then stop position determination processing is terminated. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, if a stop command has been issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is terminated without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the description of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is finished, the process advances to step S3303 to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command is generated is determined, the next stop command is issued in step S3301 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command is generated has actually stopped. Determine whether or not it has occurred. Therefore, the player can issue stop commands continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. It should be noted that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process), but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel for which the stop command is generated is equal to the stop symbol number. stop.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, it means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the process proceeds to step S3305, and an all reel stop completion command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all-reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S3306, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42-44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are all OFF. If the input signal from one of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the game stands by. If all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in a non-operated state, the process advances to step S3307 to transmit an operation end command to the display control device 81. FIG. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor has been cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the processing ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the completion of the braking process in the stepping motor control process and the convergence of the swinging of the reel.

Next, among the various types of processing performed by the display control device 81, processing related to the present invention will be described. Briefly describing the processing configuration of the display control device 81, the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. Timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is performed approximately every 10 msec. The display control device 81 also receives various commands such as a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 to grasp the progress of the game and the like, and starts corresponding processing.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not an operation end command has been received, and if an operation end command has not been received, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation end command is received, it means that all of the stop switches 42 to 44 have not been operated, that is, the operation of issuing stop commands to all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has ended. do. In such a case, the process advances to step S3502 to set 18000 to the standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 . Note that the value of the standby timer is decremented by one in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether or not the production flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the processing is terminated as it is.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing. The start waiting process is a process performed in the main process, and is executed based on the reception of the operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the production flag is set. If the production flag is not set, the process advances to step S3603 to determine whether or not the production switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S3604 to determine whether or not the value of the standby timer has become zero. If the standby timer value is not 0, the process advances to step S3605 to determine whether or not the number of bets is 0. Although detailed description is omitted, the main controller 101 sends a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control device 81 in the medal insertion process performed when medals are inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated. send to. The display control device 81 determines whether or not the bet number is 0 based on the bet number indicated by the received bet number command or the bet number command is not received. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, selection menu execution processing is performed. In this slot machine 10, game history, payout table, sound volume adjustment, game history clear, and menu end are displayed on the menu screen as selection menus. In the selection menu execution processing, when the selection switch 68 is operated, processing is performed to highlight the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68, and when the effect switch 67 is operated, the highlighted selection menu is displayed. Do what you want to do. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated in a situation where menu termination has been selected, ie whether or not the menu termination operation has been performed. If the menu end operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S3704 to determine whether or not the number of bets is zero. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3702 to continue the selection menu execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that the menu termination operation has been performed, menu termination processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and the like displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 are hidden and the normal screen is displayed. In the following step S3706, 18000 is set to the standby timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. If it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, it means that the player has performed an operation (betting medals or virtual medals) to start the next game round while the menu screen or the like is being displayed. . In such a case, the process advances to step S3707 to perform the above-described menu end processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of a start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the standby timer has become 0, standby processing is performed in step S3607.

In the waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, a customer waiting effect is started at step S3801. In the customer waiting effect, a predetermined demo movie (attract effect) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . It should be noted that, instead of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the power saving mode is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while shifting to the power saving mode. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65 is lowered and the power saving mode is entered without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the production switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 is not operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the number of bets is 0, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. When it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3804, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3805. After that, the process moves to step S3701 of menu processing. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect is terminated in step S3806, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3807. After that, the process proceeds to step S3901 of a start command waiting process, which will be described later.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process, when it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, a start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start command waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not a start command has been received. The start instruction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and is transmitted when it is determined that the start instruction is generated in step S206 (see FIG. 11) of the normal processing. be done. If the start instruction command has not been received, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the number of bets is 0, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, the standby timer is set to 18000 in step S3903, and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. A representative example of a situation where the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when the player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that the start instruction command has been received, it means that the game round has started, so the process proceeds to the in-game process of step S3904. Although the detailed explanation of the in-game process is omitted, in the in-game process, for example, when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell in the notification mode, the operation order that can establish the winning of the bell is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. etc. are processed.

As described above, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated while the game is not being played, and when the value of the standby timer becomes 0, Start waiting for customers.

In this slot machine 10, when an extra lottery is won in an information mode, after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, the player is made to operate a performance switch 67 to notify the number of extra coins. Therefore, the processing performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a pressing effect will be described below.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing performed in the above-described in-game processing. The effect determination process is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if not received, this processing ends. When a lottery result command is received, it progresses to step S4002 and it is determined whether the present game mode is information mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, this processing is terminated as it is, and if the rare combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S4004, and an effect execution lottery is performed. In the effect execution lottery, win/loss determination is performed based on the type of the rare winning combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . Incidentally, in the effect execution lottery, if the watermelon is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/10, and if the cherry is won, the effect execution lottery is won with a probability of about 1/2. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not the lottery for effect execution is won. If the effect execution lottery is won, the effect flag is set in step S4006, and this processing is terminated. If the effect execution lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4007, and it is determined whether or not the addition command has been received. The add-on command is a command transmitted from the main controller 101 when the add-on lottery is won, and is transmitted before the lottery result command when the add-on lottery is won (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. In such a case, an effect flag is set in step S4006, and this processing ends. If no add-on command has been received, the process ends. When the display control device 81 receives the add-on command, the display control device 81 stores the add-on count indicated by the add-on command in the add-on count counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

When all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 transmits an operation end command to the display control device 81 .

When the operation end command is received, the display control device 81 determines that the effect flag is set in step S3303 of the operation end command process shown in FIG. 55, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the effect switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and pressing display for prompting the player to operate the effect switch 67 is started. In the subsequent step S3305, 1000 is set to the first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. Note that the value of the first timer is decremented by one in timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. If the first timer is set to 1000, the operation end command process is terminated.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, when the effect flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 and the pressing effect process is performed in step S3602.

In the pressing effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, it is determined at step S4101 whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the effect switch 67 is operated, the process proceeds to step S4102 to set the result flag. Here, the result flag is a flag for starting the display of the result of informing the number of extra coins if winning the extra lottery and notifying that the extra lottery will not be won if the winning the extra lottery is not won.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing result display processing performed in timer interrupt processing of the display control device 81 .

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, the result flag is cleared in step S4202, and the display flag is set in step S4203. In step S4204, the display counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. The ROM of the display control device 81 stores in advance the result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery is not won. there is The result display image data consists of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200. In step S4205, the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is The associated image data is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . When the image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S4206 to determine whether or not the on-display flag has been set. If neither the result flag nor the display flag are set, it means that the result is not being displayed, so the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the display flag is set, it means that the result display is being executed. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter has reached 200. If the value of the display counter has not reached 200, the processing ends. When the value of the display counter reaches 200, it means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, that is, the result display has been executed to the end. , a completion flag is set in step S4211. In step S4212, 300 is set to the second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. Note that the value of the second timer is decremented by one in the timer interrupt processing. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer becomes 0 after approximately 3 seconds. If the second timer is set to 300, the result display process is terminated.

As described above, when the result flag is set in the pressing effect process, the result display process is activated in the timer interrupt process at approximately 10 msec intervals, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. It should be noted that when the result display is executed to the end, the auxiliary display section 65 continues to display the final image data of the result display image data until the transition to any of the above-described menu processing, standby processing, and start command waiting processing. is displayed (see FIG. 56).

Returning to the description of the pressing effect processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer has become 0. If the value of the first timer has not become 0, the value of the first timer is set to 0. Wait until When the value of the first timer becomes 0, it means that about 10 seconds have passed since the pressing display was started. In such a case, the process advances to step S4104 to determine whether or not the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is set, it means that the result display has been executed to the end. Therefore, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag has not been set, it means that the result is being displayed, so the process proceeds to step S4107 and waits until the value of the second timer becomes zero. More specifically, in step S4107, the value of the display counter is 20 and the value of the second timer becomes zero. When the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and this processing ends.

Here, a specific description will be given of the subsequent flow when the pressing display is performed.

When the pressing display is performed, the pressing display is continued on the auxiliary display section 65 until the production switch 67 is operated. Then, when the effect switch 67 is operated in the state where the pressing display is being performed, the result display is started. It takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end.

Here, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds from the start of the pressed display, the final display of the result will be completed within about 10 seconds from the start of the pressed display. can run up to Therefore, in such a case, since the completion flag is also set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, the pressing effect process is terminated immediately and the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. Become. At this time, the value of the second timer is not referenced. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds from the start of the pressed display, the menu screen is displayed after about 10 seconds from the start of the pressed display. The operation of the effect switch 67 (hereinafter also referred to as "menu start operation") becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds to about 10 seconds after the start of the press display, the timing is about 10 seconds after the start of the press display in the middle of the result display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and after the value of the second timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. It will be done. That is, if the effect switch 67 is operated within about 8 seconds to about 10 seconds after the start of the pressing display, the effect switch 67 is pressed after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display was completed. After about 5 seconds have passed since the operation, the menu start operation becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated after about 10 seconds or more have passed since the start of the pressing display, the completion flag will not be set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0 (result display is not started), the result display is executed to the end, and after the value of the second timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3603 of the start waiting process. That is, if the production switch 67 is operated after about 10 seconds or more have passed since the start of the pressing display, the production switch 67 will be operated after 3 seconds have passed since the result display has been executed to the end. After about 5 seconds have elapsed from , the menu entry operation becomes effective.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a conventional slot machine, menu processing is not executed after a game in which an auxiliary effect progressing triggered by the operation of the effect switch, such as the above-described pressing effect, is executed, that is, the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. there was something In such a configuration, when a menu screen is desired to be displayed, it is necessary to continue the game until a game in which the pressing effect is not executed occurs, which causes the player to feel frustrated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the menu processing is executed even after the game in which the pressing effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances that the menu screen can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the press display is started, the menu start operation is enabled when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the menu starts when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, becomes 0. The configuration is such that there is a case where the operation is valid. With such a configuration, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective can be changed according to the start timing of result display, that is, the operation timing of the effect switch 67 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated when the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch 67 is operated.

Certainly, the configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after the game in which the pressing effect is executed can be configured to enable the menu start operation after a certain period of time, such as 3 seconds, has elapsed after the result display has been executed to the end, for example. is. However, with such a configuration, it is conceivable that the player would be irritated by having to wait three seconds. In order to eliminate this concern, it is possible to configure the menu start operation to be effective immediately after the result display is completed to the end. A new problem arises in that there is an opportunity for the screen to be displayed. When the result display is executed to the end, when the player operates the effect switch 67 again in anticipation of further development of the effect such as the so-called reversal effect, the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 are switched from the pressing effect to the menu screen. This is because

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, unless the effect switch 67 is operated at the timing of about 8 seconds after the pressing display is started, the result A grace period can be provided from the time the display is completed to the time the menu start operation becomes effective. Due to the presence of such grace time, it is possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a timing unintended by the player. This may lead to the player's frustration that he or she must wait for the grace period, but the length of the grace period changes depending on the operation timing of the effect switch 67 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to operate the effect switch 67 while having an inquisitive mind, such as whether the menu start operation is already effective this time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration.

As a result, the slot machine 10 can preferably solve the above concerns, and reduces the chances of the player feeling frustrated when the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch 67 is operated. It becomes possible to

When the value of the first timer becomes 0, if the completion flag indicating that the result display has been executed to the end is set, the menu start operation is enabled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the menu start operation from becoming effective during the result display.

The configuration is such that 1000 is set to the value of the first timer. When the press display is started, the time required from the time when the player recognizes the press display to the time when the effect switch 67 is actually operated is 5 seconds, even if the operation is performed with the expectation that the number of additional coins will be notified. It is assumed that it is common to fit within Since it takes about 2 seconds to display the result to the end, by setting the value of the first timer to 1000, there is an opportunity to display the menu screen at a timing not intended by the player. can be reduced. Further, in such a configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated before about 8 seconds have passed since the start of the pressing display, the menu start operation becomes effective after about 10 seconds. While prompting the user to operate , it is possible to reduce the chance that the time between the pressing display and the result display will be lengthened.

The configuration is such that 300 is set to the value of the second timer. If the result display is not executed to the end at the timing when about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the pressing display, it is possible that the player has not operated the effect switch 67 due to leaving the seat or the like. In such a case, the menu screen is displayed at a timing not intended by the player by configuring the menu start operation to be effective after about 3 seconds have passed since the result display is executed to the end. can be reduced.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the notification mode is terminated based on the number of net increases, but the notification mode may be terminated based on the number of games played. Therefore, this configuration will be described in detail below. Since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the points of difference will be described below.

First, processing performed by main controller 101 will be described.

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the normal section is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the normal section, when winning some combination in the 3-card game, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/1.2 that a player wins some role, and a probability of about 1/6.4 is that a player loses. Therefore, the normal section can be completed in one game by playing the three-card game. When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the chance mode is started, and 700 is set as the transition game number (see FIG. 26).

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the chance mode differs from that of the first embodiment in the game section processing.

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the chance mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4301, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S4301, so the section command was transmitted in step S4311. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a 3-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4304, and it is determined whether or not the transition flag is set in step S4305. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won. Change the existing game mode flag to a notification flag. In the following step S4309, 50 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S4310, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S4311, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has not been won. In such a case, the process advances to step S4307 to determine whether or not the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the transition game number counter value, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the interval information storage area 106d is changed to a notification flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, 50 is set to the transition game number counter, and in step S4310, 0 is set to the mode game number counter. After that, in step S4311, a section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4303 that the current game is not a 3-card game but a 2-card game, the interval command is transmitted in step S4311 without updating the mode game number counter, etc., and this processing ends. do.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process (step S309, see FIG. 12) that is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process, and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the current game is a three-card game. If it is a three-card game, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not a rare combination has been won. If a rare combination is won, the process advances to step S4403 to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the value of the number-of-transition-games counter. In the additional lottery, the win/loss determination is performed based on the winning flag that is set and the random number obtained when determining the win/loss of the role. By the way, in the additional lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win watermelon, you will win any of the additional games 50, 100, or 300 with a probability of about 1/5, and if you win cherry, you will win about 1/3. 50 additional games will be won with a probability of . In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is won, the process advances to step S4405 to perform a post-notification lottery as to whether or not the number of games to be added is to be notified in a game after the current game. In the post-notification lottery, the success/failure determination is performed based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success/failure of the combination. If the post-notification lottery is not won, an add-on flag is set in step S4407, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S4408. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the add-on lottery and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the number-of-transfer-games counter. In step S4409, the value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the post-notification lottery is won, the post-notification command is transmitted at step S4410 without setting the addition flag. Here, the post-notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the winning of the post-notification lottery and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the counter for the number of transition games. . In step S4409, the value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process is terminated. If the player does not win the additional lottery, the processing is terminated as it is. Also, if the current game is not the 3-coin game but the 2-coin game, or if the rare combination is not won, this process is terminated without performing the above-mentioned extra lottery.

As described above, when winning the addition lottery, the addition command or the post-notification command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . When the add-on flag is set and the add-on command is transmitted, the number of add-on games is reported in the pseudo game as described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). Further, when the post-notification command is transmitted without setting the add-on command, the number of add-on games is notified in the resurrection effect to be described later. In addition, when the pseudo-game lottery is won in the situation where the post-notification command is transmitted (see FIG. 16), the number of additional games is notified by the resurrection effect instead of the pseudo-game.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process that is performed after the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end of the game.

In step S4501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not the advantageous section but the normal section, it means that the advantageous section end processing was performed in the end determination processing of step S4501, so the section command was transmitted in step S4508. Afterwards, this process is terminated.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4503, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S4504. Determine whether or not When the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the advantageous section end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and the section command is transmitted in step S4508 to end this processing. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S4505, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S4506. In step S4507, an initialization process is executed upon completion of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process of initializing the information related to the instruction function (for example, the counter value of the number of games in the section) stored in the section information storage area 106d is executed.

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S4509 to determine whether or not the finish flag is set. If the finish flag is not set, it is determined in step S4510 whether or not the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50. The number of remaining games in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process advances to step S4511 to determine whether or not the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. When the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, a completion flag is set at step S4512, and 1500 is set to the transition game number counter at step S4513. When 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section, and when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. Therefore, when the transition game number counter is set to 1500 under the condition that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous section and the notification mode are terminated when the difference number in the advantageous section reaches 2400. It will happen. In step S 4514 , a finish command is transmitted to the display control device 81 to indicate that the end of the race is confirmed with the number of difference 2400 . After that, in step S4508, the section command is transmitted, and this process ends.

When it is determined in step S4509 that the finish flag is set, when it is determined in step S4510 that the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 50 or less, and in step S4511 the value of the difference number counter is 2200 or less. If it is determined that the interval command is transmitted in step S4508, the process ends.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effects on the auxiliary display section 65 when the notification mode (advantageous section) passes through the normal section to the chance mode (advantageous section). Therefore, hereinafter, various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be described in line with the flow of the game.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when the chance mode is shifted to the notification mode will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing section command processing in the notification mode. The section command process is a process that is started when a section command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started after the game ends.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game interval storage area for storing information on the game interval indicated by the interval command. The game interval storage area is composed of a first area for storing information indicated by the interval command received in the current game and a second area for storing information indicated by the interval command received in the previous game. In step S4601, when information indicating the chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating the notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. do. In step S4602, a start flag is set. At step S4603, the display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and at step S4604, the post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. After that, in step S4605, shift notification processing is performed, and this processing ends. By performing the shift notification process, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode will start from the next game and that the number of games that can be played under the notification mode is 50 games. There is and is displayed.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing start command processing in the notification mode. When determining that a start command has been issued (step S206, see FIG. 11), main controller 101 transmits a start command to display control device 81 . The start command process is a process that is activated when a start command transmitted from main controller 101 is received, and is activated at the start of the game.

In step S4701, it is determined whether or not the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, it means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By carrying out such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, as shown in FIG. be done. Although detailed description is omitted, the control for informing the operating order when the winning order of pressing the bell is won is performed in the lottery result command process started when the lottery result command is received (step S310, FIG. 12). reference).

Next, the processing performed by the display control device 81 when the finish command is not received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 to receive a finish command. determine whether or not If the completion command has not been received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the displayed game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined whether or not the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1 in step S4611. If the value of the display game number counter is not 1, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not the value of the display game number counter is 0, and if the value of the display game number counter is not 0. , the processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the display game number counter has become 1, it means that the next game will be the last game in the notification mode at least in the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, an end flag is set in step S4612, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the display game number counter has become 0, it means that the post-notification lottery has been won in any of the games until the value of the display game number counter becomes 0. do. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode ends, the main controller 101 transmits not the section command indicating the notification mode but the section command indicating the normal section (see FIG. 65). In such a case, the revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the post-notification game number counter is set in the display game number counter in step S4615. When a post-notification command indicating that the player has won the post-notification lottery is received, the number of additional games indicated by the post-notification command is added to the post-notification game number counter. Thereafter, in step S4616, the post-notification game number counter is set to 0, and this processing ends.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is checked in step S4704 if the end flag is set. judge. If the end flag has not been set, the flow advances to step S4707 to determine whether or not the revival flag has been set. If the revival flag is not set, the process advances to step S4710 to determine whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the display game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4712, and this process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of remaining games with a subtraction of 1 each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game will be the last game in the notification mode at least in the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In such a case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4706, and this process ends. By carrying out such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays, as shown in FIG. is displayed. The lottery result command is received after the start command is received, but when the lottery result command indicating that the winning order of the bell is won is received, in addition to the display of the end screen, the bell prize is established. The order of operations that can be performed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . For example, when receiving a lottery result command indicating that the middle left and right bells have been won, as shown in FIG. The operation order of “213” is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag has been set, it means that the post-notification lottery has been won, that is, there is an unannounced number of additional games. In such a case, the resurrection flag is cleared in step S4708, resurrection effect processing is performed in step S4709, and this processing ends. By performing the revival effect processing, as shown in FIG. ) are displayed, and then the normal screen in the notification mode shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, when the completion command is not received in the notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of the game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display section 65 becomes 0. Then, when the post-notification lottery is won, the revival performance is performed at the start of the next game after the end screen is displayed to notify the continuation of the notification mode.

Next, processing performed by the display control device 81 when a finish command is received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 to receive a finish command. determine whether or not When the finish command is received, it means that the end of the race with the difference number of 2400 is confirmed. In such a case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and 1500 is set in the display game number counter in step S4608. After that, in step S4609, ending notification processing is performed, and this processing ends. By performing the ending notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the ending video will start from the next game.

In the section command processing in the game after the completion command is received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined whether or not the value of the display game number counter has become 1 in step S4611. do. As described above, in the section command processing when the finish command is received, 1500 is set in the displayed game number counter in step S4608. Therefore, it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter is not 1 in the section command processing in the game after the completion command is received. For the same reason, in step S4613 proceeding from step S4611, it is determined that the value of the display game number counter is not 0, and this processing is terminated.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in step S4710. If the ending flag is set, the ending execution process is performed in step S4711, and then this process ends. In the ending execution process, a process of displaying a predetermined ending image on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed.

As described above, when it is confirmed that the notification mode ends with the difference number of 2400, a predetermined ending image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the next game until the notification mode and the advantageous section are finished.

Processing performed by the display control device 81 when the notification mode is shifted to the normal section will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the notification mode is stored in the second area of the game interval storage area and the information indicating the normal interval is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the normal section, the process advances to step S4802 to set the continuous game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 to 1. After that, this process is terminated. If the current game is not a transition game to the normal section, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in step S4803, and this processing ends.

In the start command process started at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, it is determined in step S4901 whether or not the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, it means that a predetermined ending image has been displayed in the notification mode. In such a case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in step S4903. After that, a continuation flag is set in step S4904, and this processing ends. By performing the above process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode is terminated and the number of won medals at the time of termination of the notification mode.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag has not been set, the process advances to step S4905 to determine whether or not the continuation flag has been set. If the continuation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4907 after setting the continuation flag in step S4906.If the continuation flag is set, the process proceeds directly to step S4907. In step S4907, processing for continuously displaying the end screen is performed. After that, this process is terminated. Note that in step S4907, processing for changing and displaying the number of medals obtained is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends with the number of difference 2400, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the first game of the normal section until the end of the normal section. When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, an end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 from the last game in the notification mode until the normal section ends.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. The lottery result command process is a process that is started when a lottery result command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started at the start stage of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not any combination has been won in the current game. If any winning combination is won in this game, it means that the lottery for transition to the chance mode has been won, ie, the transition to the chance mode will be made from the next game, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if no hand has been won in the current game, that is, if the normal section continues in the next game, the flow advances to step S5002 to determine whether or not the value of the continued game number counter is smaller than 6. . If the value of the continuous game number counter is smaller than 6, a suggestive jewel selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggestive jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting state of the slot machine 10 and the random number acquired by the display control device 81 . By the way, in the suggestive orb selection lottery, in the case of setting 1 or setting 2, 40% of blue orbs are selected, 30% of yellow orbs are selected, 20% of green orbs are selected, and 10 Select a red orb with a percentage percentage. In the case of setting 3 or 4, 20% of blue orbs are selected, 30% of yellow orbs are selected, 30% of green orbs are selected, and 20% of red orbs are selected. do. In the case of setting 5 or 6, 10% of blue orbs are selected, 20% of yellow orbs are selected, 30% of green orbs are selected, and 40% of red orbs are selected. do. Note that the selection rate may be different for each of the settings 1 to 6. FIG. In step S5004, a process of displaying the selection result of the suggestive jewel selection lottery on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the number-of-continued-games counter is equal to or greater than 6, the process proceeds to step S5005 to display on the auxiliary display section 65 the fixed orb indicating the setting state of the slot machine 10. conduct. After that, this process is terminated. For example, when the slot machine 10 with setting 6 performs the process of displaying the confirmed jewel, the end screen and the jewel indicated as 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 73(f). Is displayed.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing all reel stop completion command processing in the normal section. The all reels stop completion command process is a process that is started when an all reels stop completion command transmitted from the main controller 101 is received, and is started at the end of the game.

In the all-reel stop completion command process, the suggestive orb displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5101, and this process ends.

As described above, in the normal section, if the chance mode is not entered, the suggestive gems are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the 1st to 5th games, and after the 6th game. If so, the confirmed jewels are displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Here, the probability of not shifting to the chance mode, that is, the probability of occurrence of failure is about 1/6.4. Therefore, a player who wants to guess the setting from the state of appearance of the suggestive orb or a player who wants to grasp the setting state from the confirmed orb must play the game so that the number of games in the normal section increases.

Next, processing performed by the display control device 81 when the normal section is shifted to the chance mode will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a game for transition to the chance mode. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and the information indicating the chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game is a game to transition to the chance mode, the process proceeds to step S4802, and 1 is set to the number-of-continued-games counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. FIG. After that, this process is terminated. If the current game is not a transition game to the chance mode, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-continued-games counter in step S4803, and this processing ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, it is determined in step S5201 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, it means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In such a case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5203. After that, in step S5204, processing for displaying the value of the continuous game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the young character walking on the road far away and the number of games in the chance mode, as shown in FIG. 73(g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, then in step S5205 processing is performed to display the value of the continuous game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of games by adding one each time a game is played.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the notification mode ends when the difference number is 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game of the game in which the difference number has reached 2400, that is, the first game in the normal section, and the notification mode ends when the transition game number is completed. In this case, the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode. In this way, by making the game in which the end screen is displayed differ depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the satisfied end condition. becomes.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends with the number of difference of 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game after the number of difference of 2400 has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of games under the condition that the notification mode has not ended. Certainly, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the next game when the difference number is 2394 or more. However, in the case of such a configuration, when the winning order bell is not won, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated in the notified operation order despite winning the pressing order bell, etc. Even though the end screen is displayed, the number of difference sheets does not reach 2400 and the notification mode is not terminated. This is because, when the event occurs, the end screen is continuously displayed until the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends.

When the number of remaining games is larger than 50 and the difference number is larger than 2200, the value of the transition game number counter is changed so that the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game from various points of view.

First, in the case of a configuration in which the advantage interval simply ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, some of the players may say that when the advantage interval (notification mode) ends when the difference number of sheets 2400 is actually reached, such an upper limit There are those who think that they would have been able to obtain more medals if there were no limit on the number of medals, and lose their desire to play the game. This is because it is rare for the difference number to reach 2400 when the number of remaining games becomes 0. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, in which the value of the transition game number counter is changed when the number of remaining games is larger than 50 and the number of difference is larger than 2200, the game is played in the notification mode to the player with the target of reaching 2200 as the number of difference. can be performed. In addition, since the expected value of the medal increase per game in the notification mode is about 3.5, if the number of remaining games is 57 or less and the difference is greater than 2200, the additional lottery is won. be equal to This is because the expected value of the number of games required to increase the number of medals by 200 is 58. As a result of the above, even in the case of setting an upper limit to the difference number in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play, and to improve the interest in the game. It becomes possible.

Next, when the notification mode is terminated with the difference number as a condition, the termination time of the notification mode changes depending on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., as described above. Therefore, in a configuration in which the termination condition of the notification mode is defined by the number of games, it is difficult to execute the ending effect over a plurality of games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the number of difference is greater than 2200, the fact that the number of difference reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends is made in advance. can be confirmed. Therefore, the number of games from when the value of the transition game number counter is changed until the difference number reaches 2400 can be secured as the number of games for displaying the ending image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the ending effect in a suitable form. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous section can be completed by the ending performance, and to play the game while making the player immersed in a sense of superiority until the difference number actually reaches 2400.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the ending effect is executed, the end screen is displayed in the first game of the normal section, so the player can enjoy the ending effect until the next game is started, and immerse himself in the afterglow. The next game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends by completing the number of transition games, the final game in the notification mode is not deviated due to the lottery result of the winning combination or the like. Therefore, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of games even though the notification mode has not ended.

When the post-notification lottery is won, the revival performance is performed in the next game in which the end screen is displayed, and the number of additional games is notified. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it is possible to operate the start lever 41 to issue a start command for the next game while expecting the continuation of the notification mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to plan

Now, let us consider a case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the notification mode is finished, as in the case where the notification mode is finished with the number of difference 2400. FIG. In such a configuration, since the game section of the game in which the end screen is displayed is already the normal section, even if the player wins the rare role in the game, the additional lottery will not be performed, and the event that the notification mode will be revived will not occur. It cannot be generated (see Figures 25 and 26). On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, since the game is in the notification mode, if a rare role is won, an additional lottery and a post-notification lottery can be performed to perform a resurrection effect. . Therefore, it becomes possible to carry out the resurrection effect in a suitable form, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. Then, after the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the final game of the notification mode, the continuation of the notification mode can be notified by the resurrection effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to amplify the satisfaction that the notification mode continues. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the resurrection effect is performed. However, it is common for players to play games continuously, and in the notification mode in which virtual medals are stored, it is not necessary to directly insert medals, so the interval between games is generally shortened. target. Therefore, if the end screen is displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, there is a possibility that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen. Events such as realizing that the previous game was the last game in the notification mode may occur. This not only leads to a waste of the prepared end screen, but also leads to a loss of satisfaction with the continuation of the notification mode. On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 that displays the end screen at the start of the final game, it is possible to solve the above concerns.

In the first game of the normal section, the end screen is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to play the first game in the normal section while enjoying the afterglow of the notification mode. In addition, in such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous section and that the resurrection effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide new game features using the conventionally prepared end screens, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not performed in the normal section, the player wants to play the game under the chance mode rather than in the normal section. There was a concern that the user would shy away from playing the slot machine in which they were staying. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is decided that it is not an advantageous section and that the resurrection effect is not performed. In such a configuration, a player who has played a game in the notification mode issues a command to start the next game in anticipation of a resurrection effect when the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode. It will happen. Therefore, when the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to cause the player who has played the game in the notification mode to play the first game in the normal section. Even if the player ends the game at such timing, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, it is possible to start the game of the second game in the normal section while making another player different from the above player expect that the resurrection effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the slot machine 10 from decreasing.

Until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode, the end screen is continuously displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects executed in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When a winning combination is won in a three-card game, the normal section is shifted to a chance mode, and a loss occurs only at a probability of about 1/6.4. Thus, by adopting a configuration in which the probability of shifting to the chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the player stays in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances that the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, and it is possible to reduce the chances that the player ends the game with the end screen displayed.

Even if the probability of shifting to the chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting as described above, an event of staying in the normal section without shifting from the normal section to the chance mode may occur. If the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is concern that the game in the normal section will become monotonous. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to display the suggestive orb or the confirmed orb when the normal section does not shift to the chance mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think about guessing the setting based on the state of appearance of the suggestive orb, or to make the player want the normal section to continue until the confirmed orb is displayed. As a result, not only is it possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, but it is also possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal section. becomes possible.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the displayed suggestive orb is hidden. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to confirm the suggestive orb and the confirmed orb without actually playing the game, and it is possible to allow the player who wants to guess the setting to play the game in the normal section. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine 10 from deteriorating due to the normal section.

From the 6th game onwards in the normal section, the configuration is such that the finalized jewel describing the setting state of the slot machine 10 is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play even when the normal section does not shift to the chance mode. This is because, if the setting state can be grasped through the fixed orb, it becomes a significant factor for determining whether or not to continue the game thereafter.

When shifting to the chance mode, the number of games in the chance mode is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the maximum number of games required before switching to the notification mode, the remaining number of games that can be played in the advantageous section, etc., and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. . On the other hand, the number of games played in the normal section is irrelevant to the number of games played in the advantageous section and the chance mode. Thus, the number of games that will not be updated until the chance mode is entered must be displayed. This leads to the player thinking that playing the game in the normal section is meaningless and thus reducing his or her desire to play the game. However, in a configuration in which the end screen is continuously displayed in each game in the normal section like the slot machine 10, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the display of the number of games in the chance mode. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

When the end screen is displayed, it is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the number of medals obtained at the present time. Then, when the end screen is displayed continuously, that is, when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the displayed number of acquired medals is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of medals the player has won in the advantageous section even when the end screen is displayed in the normal section. In addition, since processing for updating the number of medals to be displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured to shift to the main game as it is, but all the reels 32L. , 32M, and 32R are slowed down for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) and then returned to the normal rotation speed, after which the game is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over through changes in the rotational speeds of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured to shift to the main game as it is, but all the reels 32L. , 32M and 32R may be quasi-stopped before proceeding to the main game, or one or two reels may be quasi-stopped before proceeding to the main game.

When it is configured to shift to the main game after pseudo-stopping one or two reels, the pseudo-game is compared to the configuration in which the main game is shifted to after pseudo-stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to quickly shift from to this game. In addition, in such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the transition to the main game by restarting the rotation of the pseudo-stopped reel again, the player will not know whether it is the pseudo game or the main game. can be avoided.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated after all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. However, the pseudo game may be terminated without stopping all spinning reels. In the case of such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform the process of starting the rotation of only the pseudo-stopped reels, so it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the transition to the main game by restarting the rotation of the pseudo-stopped reel again, the player will not know whether it is the pseudo game or the main game. can be avoided.

(4) In the above-described first embodiment, when the rotating reel is pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, the same processing as when a pseudo-stop command is generated is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which processing different from that in the case where a command is issued. In this configuration, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to quasi-stop the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the settlement switch 59 is operated to quasi-stop the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. It is possible to change the stop result of the symbol in the case of . As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the settlement switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that the player can select which one to operate.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the spinning reels are immediately pseudo-stopped at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the symbol stop position. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to cause an event such as the symbol to stop at a position shifted by half the symbol from the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, even if the additional lottery is won, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped so that the combination of "red 7" symbols does not stop on the middle line L2. Let

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reel is pseudo-stopped at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the stop position when the pseudo-stop command is generated.

(5) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in the pseudo-game, it is determined that the cancel operation has been performed, but the operation is not limited to the settlement switch 59, and the game Any operation that does not involve the progress of the game after the start of the turn may be performed. Therefore, it may be determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, or it may be determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the second credit input switch 57 is operated. . A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit insertion switch 58 has been operated.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of determining whether or not a cancel operation has been performed, the pseudo-game may be terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without generating a pseudo-stop command.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. It is good also as a structure which carries out a false stop of one. With such a configuration, when one reel is pseudo-stopped, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice to pseudo-stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(7) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo-game is ended as it is, and at least one reel is pseudo-stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under certain circumstances, all spinning reels are pseudo-stopped. I wish I had.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, one reel is pseudo-stopped while the other two reels are pseudo-gamed without pseudo-stopping. terminate. When the settlement switch 59 is operated while one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated after the other two reels are pseudo-stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is terminated without the other one reel being pseudo-stopped.

(8) In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the reel in the pseudo-game and the rotation speed of the reel in the main game are equal, but the rotation speed of the reel in the pseudo-game and the reel in the main game may be configured to have different rotational speeds.

(9) In the above-described first embodiment, the stop information setting process is performed after the rotation start process is performed. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, or the stop information setting process may be performed after the instruction monitor display process.

(10) In the first embodiment, the slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the additional lottery winning and the slip table for pseudo stop control in the pseudo game based on the pseudo game lottery winning are stored in advance. Although the configuration is such that the slide table is referred to when a pseudo stop command is issued, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined that the pseudo-game flag is set at step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if it is a pseudo-game based on the additional lottery winning, the stop symbol number is "15 ' is set, and if the pseudo-game based on the pseudo-game lottery winning, if the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, "15" is set as the stop symbol number, and the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel. If it is 32R, "16" is set as the stop symbol number. As the stop symbol number is set, the processing of steps S1107 and S1108 is not performed.

In the case of such a configuration, in addition to being able to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a slide table in advance, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. .

(11) In the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to slide up to 19 symbols in the pseudo game, but as in this game, within a predetermined time after the pseudo stop command is generated It is good also as a structure which carries out a pseudo stop.

However, in the case of such a configuration, if it is configured to set the pseudo-game stop information after the pseudo-stop command is generated, it will not be possible to slide 4 symbols due to the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information. It is possible.

Therefore, in the case of performing the same stop control as in the main game, in the stop information setting process, the stop information for the main game and the stop information for the pseudo-game are set. At this time, the stop information for this game is set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for pseudo-game is set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

In the case of such a configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process will be longer, there is no need to set the stop information for this game when moving from the pseudo-game to the main game, so from the pseudo-game to the main game It is possible to quickly shift to a game.

At this time, when setting the pseudo-game stop information based on the additional lottery winning, the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game is set as the pseudo-game stop information, and the pseudo-game lottery When setting the stop information for pseudo-game based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of loss in this game is set as the stop information for pseudo-game. With such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo-game and the stop information for the main game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the above-described first embodiment, the stop information for pseudo-game is not set in the stop information setting process, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in FIG. 15, it is configured to determine whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set in step S403. And, when the pseudo-game flag is set, in the stop information setting process, it is configured to set the stop information for pseudo-game instead of the stop information for this game. When the pseudo-game flag is not set, in the stop information setting process, it is configured to set the stop information for this game. At this time, when the stop information for pseudo-game is set, that is, when it is after the end of the pseudo-game, the stop information for pseudo-game is rewritten to the stop information for this game. That is, the storage area in which the pseudo-game stop information is set and the storage area in which the stop information for this game is set are the same area. Then, the processing of step S1104 in the stop position determination processing is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the stop information storage area 106b.

At this time, when setting the pseudo-game stop information based on the additional lottery winning, the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game is set as the pseudo-game stop information, and the pseudo-game lottery When setting the stop information for pseudo-game based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of loss in this game is set as the stop information for pseudo-game. With such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo-game and the stop information for the main game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the above-described first embodiment, the slide table for the pseudo game is prepared in advance, but the stop information may be set in the same manner as in the present game.

(14) In the above-described first embodiment, when the "red 7" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2 in the pseudo-game, there is a privilege to notify that the number of net increase is increased. Although it is configured to be awarded, it is not limited to such a configuration, and any configuration may be employed as long as a privilege different from the privilege that is granted when a prize such as medal payout is established is granted. Typical examples of benefits different from the benefits given when a prize is established include, for example, performing a setting suggesting effect, and subsequently suggesting a winning combination in the game.

(15) In the above-described first embodiment, a pseudo-game is performed when winning the additional lottery and when winning the pseudo-game lottery, but the conditions for performing the pseudo-game are arbitrary.

For example, in the final game in the notification mode, a pseudo game is performed.

For example, when a rare role is won, a pseudo-game is performed regardless of whether the additional lottery is successful or not.

(16) In the above-described first embodiment, when the additional lottery is won, the pseudo-game is executed in the game round, but it may be configured to perform the pseudo-game in the next game round in which the additional lottery is won. . With such a configuration, it is possible to start the next round of the game after letting the player know that the rare combination has been won, that is, that the additional lottery has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game cycle while waiting for the start of the pseudo-game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the pseudo-game may be executed in a predetermined number of game rounds, such as after five games, instead of the next game round.

(17) In the above-described first embodiment, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, it is configured not to notify whether or not it has been added. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which notification is made as to whether or not it has been completed.

(18) In the above-described first embodiment, when the cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, no notification is made as to whether or not the addition has been made. For example, the number of remaining payouts displayed in the game is updated, but the number of remaining payouts displayed in the game may not be updated even if the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced additional number may be notified in the subsequent pseudo-game, or may be notified in the final game in the notification mode.

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and means to notify that it is a pseudo-game It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with That is, it may be configured to provide a pseudo-game lamp that is lit and displayed only during the pseudo-game, or may be configured to notify that the pseudo-game is in progress by swinging the stopped reels up and down in the pseudo-game. .

(20) In the above-described second embodiment, the waiting process is performed by waiting for 100 msec.

(21) In the above-described second embodiment, after determining that the instruction monitor is not being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor, the standby process is performed to wait for 100 msec. After determining that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, after determining the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the position where the standby process is performed is arbitrary. However, the closer to the process of determining whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, the more it is necessary to set a longer time than 100 msec as the waiting time in the waiting process, so the next game round should be started. There is a concern that it may be delayed until it becomes possible.

(22) In the second embodiment, after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. However, after determining that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it became. Further, in such a configuration, after transmitting the operation end command, it may be determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have become the stop symbol numbers. In other words, the all reels stop completion command may be transmitted after the operation end command is transmitted.

(23) In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not all of the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state after transmitting the all reel stop completion command. The all reel stop completion command may be transmitted after determining that the switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. At this time, if the operation end command is transmitted after the all reels stop completion command is transmitted, the same effect as the second embodiment can be expected.

(24) In the above-described second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, and all the stop switches 42 to 44 are unoperated. Although the order of determining whether or not the state has occurred and the order of transmitting the all-reel stop completion command and the operation end command are the same, they may be different. For example, after determining that the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol numbers, it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. On the other hand, the command transmission order is such that the all-reels stop completion command is transmitted after the operation end command. However, if such a configuration is used, there is a concern that the processing configuration may become complicated and the storage capacity may increase.

(25) In the second embodiment, when the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the stop symbol numbers, the all reel stop completion command is transmitted, but the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R may be transmitted individually. More specifically, in step S2204, when it is determined that the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are the stop symbol numbers while the middle reel 32M is not the stop symbol number, the left reel stop completion command is issued. A right reel stop completion command is transmitted, and the CPU waits until the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number. Then, when the middle reel 32M becomes the stop symbol number, after transmitting the middle reel stop completion command, the process proceeds to step S2206. In this configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output the third notification sound when all of the left reel stop completion command, the middle reel stop completion command, and the right reel stop completion command are received, the second It can be expected that the same effects as in the embodiment of .

The same applies to the operation end command, and the left operation end command, the middle operation end command, and the right operation end command may be transmitted individually.

(26) In the above second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are transmitted in this game, but in the configuration of performing a pseudo game as in the first embodiment, It may be configured to transmit an all reel stop completion command or an operation end command in a pseudo-game.

(27) In the above-described third embodiment, both the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header are composed of 1 byte, but needless to say, they may be composed of 2 bytes or more.

(28) In the third embodiment, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the header are configured to be the same byte, but they may be configured with different bytes. For example, the pseudo-game flag storage area may consist of 1 byte and the header may consist of 2 bytes. Even in the case of such a configuration, when the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area and the predetermined 1 byte of the header information, the above Effects similar to those of the third embodiment can be obtained.

(29) In the above-described third embodiment, the header information to be transmitted in the case of this game is stored in advance, but this configuration will be changed.

In the above-described third embodiment, the pseudo-game flag storage area and the fifth bit of the header are blank, but the fifth bit is configured to function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. Then, when clearing the pseudo-game flag (step S611, see FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "0", and the pseudo-game flag storage area The configuration is such that the fifth bit is set to "1". When the pseudo-game flag is set (step S504, see FIG. 16), the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "1" and the fifth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area is set to "0". It is configured to be set.

Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment can be obtained.

(30) In the third embodiment, the information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo-game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body, or may be included in the header. . Even in the case of these configurations, creating a body to be sent by adding pseudo-game determination information to body information, or creating a header to be sent by adding pseudo-game determination information to header information In this case, it is clear that the same effects as those of the third embodiment are obtained.

(31) In the third embodiment, the header is created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, but the header is created by performing other predetermined calculation such as subtraction. Even so, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

(32) In the above-described third embodiment, the command to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo-game and the command to be transmitted in the case of a real game are different, but this configuration is changed.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the BB state and the command to be transmitted in the non-BB state may be different. In such a configuration, a BB state storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is in the BB state, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the BB state storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the normal section and the command to be transmitted in the advantageous section may be different. In such a configuration, an advantageous section storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is an advantageous section, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the advantageous section storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the notification mode (AT game) and the command to be transmitted in the non-notification mode (non-AT game) are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a notification mode storage area is provided for storing information indicating whether or not the notification mode is set, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, the command to be transmitted in the case of the 3-card game and the command to be transmitted in the case of the 2-card game are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a bet number storage area is provided for storing information as to whether or not it is a three-card game, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and the header information. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment.

For example, a command to be sent in the case of BB1 state (BB state of 3-card game), a command to be sent in the case of BB2 state (BB state of 2-card game), and a command to be sent in the case of non-BB state and are configured to be different. In such a configuration, a game state storage area is provided for storing information indicating which game state the player is in, and the header is created by adding the information stored in the game state storage area and the header information. , it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the third embodiment. In order to include information indicating which of the three types of game states is in the header, it is necessary to prepare at least two bits for storing the above information in the game state storage area and the header. be.

It is of course possible to combine the above configurations. For example, by adding the pseudo-game determination information and the information stored in the bet number storage area to the header information, it is possible to determine whether it is a pseudo-game, whether it is a three-piece game or a two-piece game, may be configured to create a header containing Also, by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information, a header including whether it is a pseudo-game is created, and by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information, a three-card game and a two-card game.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, when transmitting the rotation start command, the stop command, and the stop command, the header is created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information. Needless to say, when transmitting other commands such as a result command, a header may be created by adding the pseudo-game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo-game flag storage area may be electrically connected to the output port. In the case of such a configuration, when the pseudo-game flag is set ("1" is stored in the 6th bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the pseudo-game flag is cleared (the If "0" is stored in the 6 bits), an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. FIG. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo-game flag storage area functions as information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-game, and outputs a signal indicating a pseudo-game to the outside of the slot machine 10. It is possible to give a function as information used when performing. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the pseudo-game flag storage area, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, the result display is started when the effect switch 67 is operated once. , the above effects can be achieved. Therefore, for example, the result display may be started when the production switch 67 is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times such as 10 times, or the result display may be started when the production switch 67 is pressed for a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. may be configured.

(36) In the fourth embodiment, the push display is started when the operation end command is received, but the push display may be started when the all reels stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the pressing display is started when the interval command is received, or the pressing display is started when the state command is received. In any of these configurations, after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the pressing display is started, so that the above-described effects can be obtained.

(37) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the pressing display is started when the operation end command is received. A configuration may be adopted in which the pressing display is started in the middle of the game round. In such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the completion flag is set in step S3601 in the start waiting process shown in FIG. With such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes valid immediately in the same way as when the depression effect is not executed, and when the operation end command is received. If the completion flag is not set, the menu start operation is validated based on the value of the first timer or second timer as described in the fourth embodiment.

(38) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after starting the press display. However, when the operation end command is received, the value of the first timer is set to 1000. Alternatively, the value of the first timer may be set to 1000 when the all reels stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the value of the first timer is set to 1000 when the interval command is received, or the value of the first timer is set to 1000 when the state command is received. Even with these configurations, only the operation start timing of the first timer changes, so the above-described effects can be achieved.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed. may be set. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the above effects can be achieved.

If the configuration is such that the completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300, and the result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the fourth embodiment can be applied. The display counter used in the embodiment becomes unnecessary.

Also, if it is configured to determine whether or not the value of the second timer is 300 or less in step S4104 of the pressing effect processing shown in FIG. 61, the completion flag becomes unnecessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the value of the second timer is set to 300 when the result display is completed, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the value of the first timer is 0 when the result display is executed to the end. If the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes effective when the value of the first timer becomes 0, that is, the value of the second timer is not referred to. The configuration is such that the result display process is terminated without setting the timer value to 300. FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation becomes effective when the value of the second timer, not the first timer, becomes 0, so 300 is set to the value of the second timer. After that, the result display process is terminated.

With the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, the second timer does not operate in a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer. It is possible to configure the first timer not to operate when the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the second timer, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

(41) In the above fourth embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with the first timer, and the menu start operation may become effective based on the value of the first timer. 101 may be provided with a first timer, and when the value of the first timer becomes 0, the configuration may be such that the time elapsed command is transmitted to the display control device 81 . With such a configuration, the display control device 81 is configured to end the pressing effect process and enable the subsequent menu start operation when the completion flag is set when the time elapsed command is received. When the completion flag is not set when the command is received, when the value of the second timer becomes 0, the depression effect processing is terminated and the subsequent menu start operation is enabled. With such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, it is possible for the main controller 101 side to define the start timing of the press display and the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance of malfunction.

The timing for setting the value of the first timer to 1000 may be set when it is determined in step S3304 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, or in step S3306 all may be set when it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. Alternatively, it may be set at another timing such as after transmission of the operation end command.

(42) In the above fourth embodiment, the display of results to be executed when the additional lottery is won and the result display to be executed when the additional lottery is not won are executed to the end. Although the required time is the same, it goes without saying that different configurations may be used. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after displaying the result to the end, when the menu start operation is validated based on the value of the second timer, the result It is possible to set a constant time from when the display is executed to the end until the menu start operation becomes effective.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18000 in the pressing effect process. 18000 may be set to end the pressing effect process. With such a configuration, the customer waiting effect is started approximately 180 seconds after the pressing effect process ends.

(45) In the fourth embodiment, the menu start operation is enabled immediately when the pressing effect is not executed. However, even when the pressing effect is not executed, the menu start operation is effective after about 10 seconds. It is good also as composition which becomes. As a configuration for realizing such a configuration, for example, when it is determined that an operation end command has been received in the operation end command process shown in FIG. is configured to set In step S3505, 1000 is not set to the value of the first timer. Then, when it is determined that the effect flag is not set in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer has become zero. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first timer has become 0, the processing shown after step S3603 is performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 when the menu start operation is performed. A configuration in which the menu screen is always displayed on the menu screen display section may be employed.

(47) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the effect switch 67 has the function of advancing the pressing effect and the function of displaying the menu screen. It may be configured to be provided separately from the switch 67 .

(48) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and game history clear. is. Therefore, a configuration including a payout table and volume adjustment may be used, or a configuration including only volume adjustment may be used. It goes without saying that in a configuration having only one type of game information to be displayed, the game information may be directly displayed instead of the menu screen when the effect switch 67 is operated.

(49) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the success or failure of the additional lottery is notified in the pressing effect. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the winning combination is notified.

(50) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration using the subtracting timer has been described, but it goes without saying that the adding timer may be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the first timer is set to 1000, subtraction of the first timer is started, but this configuration is changed. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at an arbitrary timing, such as the timing at which a start command is generated, before the pressing display is started. Then, in step S3505 (see FIG. 55) of operation end command processing, the configuration is such that subtraction of the first timer is permitted. Even with such a configuration, the operation and effect described in the fourth embodiment can be achieved because the first timer is activated when the process of step S3505 is performed.

(52) In the above fourth embodiment, when a bet number command indicating that the number of bets has become 1 or more is received during the pressing effect process, the pressing effect process is ended and the start command waiting process is started. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In such a configuration, the press display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 ends at the timing when the player bets medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when the pressing effect is executed has been focused and explained from this point of view. It is clear that the same effects as those described above can be obtained with respect to the timing of transition to . This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby timer has become 0 after the pressing effect process is finished.

(54) In the above fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode. The configuration may be such that the end screen is displayed after the stop.

(55) In the above fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the completion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the final game in the notification mode, but at least one reel stops. With a configuration in which the end screen is displayed before, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be obtained. This is because it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of time for displaying the end screen.

At this time, if the end screen is displayed after the two reels are stopped, it is possible to grasp whether or not the bell wins at least when the bell is won in the order of pressing. As the number of sheets, it is possible to display the number of sheets difference at the end of the notification mode.

(56) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends with the number of difference 2400. In addition, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends with the number of interval games 1500. may be configured to perform

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the notification mode is terminated according to the number of games played in the notification mode. good too. Even in such a configuration, if the end screen is displayed not based on the reception of the start command, but based on the reception of the lottery result command indicating that the pressing order bell has been won, the above-described fifth step can be performed. It is possible to achieve the effects described in the embodiment.

(58) In the fifth embodiment, only the display control device 81 is configured to grasp the number of post-notification games. Alternatively, both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 may be configured to grasp the number of post-notification games.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, when winning the extra lottery, the number of games to be added is notified in the pseudo game, and the number of games to be added is notified in the resurrection effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the additional number of games is notified only in the resurrection effect.

(60) In the above-described fifth embodiment, when a rare combination is won in the notification mode, an additional lottery is performed. Any configuration may be used as long as it can notify the user of the fact. For example, the notification mode may end after 50 games per set, and a set number addition lottery (revival lottery or continuation lottery) may be performed in a predetermined game such as when shifting to the notification mode or when one set ends.

(61) In the above-described fifth embodiment, as conditions for determining the end of the notification mode with the number of difference 2400, the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the number of difference is greater than 2200. The setting of conditions is arbitrary. Only the number of remaining games may be set as a condition, or only the difference number may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, when the end of the notification mode with the difference number of 2400 is confirmed, the ending effect is started from the next game, but the timing of starting the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be started from the next game in which the difference number reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be started from the next game in which the difference number reaches 2250. - 特許庁That is, it is sufficient to start with the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode is performed. It is good also as a structure which performs the assistance production of.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends, the advantageous section ends, and the event in which the advantageous section ends under the chance mode does not occur. A configuration in which a termination event occurs is also possible. For example, in addition to the lottery for transition to the notification mode under the chance mode, an end lottery for the end of the advantageous section may be performed, or the transition to the chance mode may be performed after the termination of the notification mode.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the mode is not shifted from the normal section to the notification mode, but the configuration may be such that the transition is made to the notification mode.

(66) In the above-described fifth embodiment, if the lottery for switching to the chance mode is not won, the suggestive orb or the confirmed orb is displayed. A suggested orb may be displayed when the transfer lottery is won.

(67) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggestive orb or the fixed orb. , the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be obtained. As the advantageous information, for example, in a configuration having a plurality of chance modes with different winning probabilities of the transition lottery to the notification mode, a configuration that suggests or notifies the transition destination of the chance mode, the number of ceiling games under the chance mode (transition game number) can be set, a typical example is a configuration that suggests or notifies the number of ceiling games to be set.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the fixed jewel is displayed after the 6th game in the normal section, but the fixed jewel is also displayed with a predetermined probability in the 1st to 5th games in the normal section. may be configured. In other words, the configuration may be such that the accuracy of setting suggestion increases according to the number of staying games in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestive orb and the fixed orb are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of display is arbitrary. In addition, although the suggestive orb and the fixed orb are hidden after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, they may be displayed continuously until the chance mode is entered. Furthermore, in a configuration that can display a menu screen, when a game history is selected, it may be configured to display suggested orbs and fixed orbs that have been displayed up to that point.

(70) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the end screen is configured to display the end of the notification mode and the number of medals won. Alternatively, only the number of medals obtained may be displayed. In addition, the indication that the notification mode is terminated is not limited to the actual character notation such as "notification mode terminated", and the termination of the notification mode can be indicated by a predetermined action such as a crying waving of a predetermined character. may be notified.

(71) In the fifth embodiment, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of won medals is not changed thereafter. The display of the number of won medals may be changed according to the game result of the game (whether or not a prize is established). Also, the display of the number of medals obtained may be changed in the normal section as well.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, the transition lottery and the additional lottery are performed only in the three-card game, but the transition lottery and the additional lottery may also be performed in the two-card game.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is terminated when the net increase number reaches 120, but the notification mode may be terminated when the payout number reaches 120. , the notification mode may be terminated when the number of games reaches 50 times.

(74) In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous lottery may be performed in the notification mode ending game, or the continuous lottery may be performed in the notification mode transition game. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a continuation lottery in the predetermined game under alerting|reporting mode. And it is good also as a structure which reports the result of these continuation lotteries in a pseudo-game.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won in the chance mode, but it is configured to be notified at a lower probability than in the notification mode. good too.

(76) In each of the above embodiments, when the notification mode ends, the advantageous section ends. .

(77) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the mode is changed from the normal section to the chance mode, and the probability of a failure occurring is about 1/6.4. The odds of being out are arbitrary. However, as the number of games in which the player stays in the normal section increases, the chances for the player to perceive that it is a normal section increase. .

(78) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 61, but the section indicator 66 can be provided at any position. However, in order to reduce the chances that the player will perceive that the game is the end of the advantageous section, it is desirable to place it at a position away from the auxiliary display section 65, for example, it is desirable to provide it at the settlement switch 59.

(79) In each of the above-described embodiments, the processing related to the game mode, such as the transition lottery, is performed on the condition that the game is three-card game. It is good also as a structure which performs the process regarding game modes, such as.

(80) In each of the above embodiments, the section display 66 is turned off during the game section process, but may be turned off during the start waiting process. Even with such a configuration, the section indicator 66 is turned off after the end of the advantageous section end game, so that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be expected. Similarly, the section indicator 66 is configured to be lit ON in the section lottery process, but it is configured to be lit ON after the rotation start process and before it is determined whether the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. good too.

(81) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified when the transition to the advantageous section is performed. It may be configured to be notified, or may be configured to be notified of the operation timing and the operation method. That is, the advantageous section may be any game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch can operate. It should be noted that the normal section may be a game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch for establishing a small winning combination does not operate.

(82) In each of the above-described embodiments, the combination of symbols that results in winning is an example, and the combination of symbols is not limited to these combinations. Also, the number of symbol combinations that result in winning is arbitrary.

(83) In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine having the BB state has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine with states as well. Further, it may be a slot machine having other game states such as CB state and MB state.

(84) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not a start command has been issued after three or two medals have been betted. Needless to say, it may be configured to determine whether or not. Further, it goes without saying that it is possible to determine whether or not a start command has been generated only after three medals have been bet, that is, to allow only three medals to be played.

(85) In each of the above-described embodiments, in addition to the privilege of changing the game state and the privilege of replaying, the privilege of paying out medals is provided as the privilege to be granted, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as the player is provided with some kind of privilege. For example, instead of paying out medals, prizes other than medals may be paid out. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(86) In each of the above-described embodiments, the slot machine has three reels arranged in parallel and one effective line. It may be a slot machine equipped with a slot machine or a slot machine having 5 activated lines.

(87) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined in the normal processing, and the processing for stopping the reel is performed in the timer interrupt processing. may be configured to perform a process of stopping the Specifically, when the stop pattern number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination process shown in FIG. Perform processing to stop the reel. After that, the processing shown after step S1109 is performed. In the case of such a configuration, after stopping the reel on which the stop command (pseudo stop command) has been generated, it is confirmed whether or not the next stop command (pseudo stop command) is generated. It becomes impossible to continuously generate a pseudo stop command).

(88) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed in the reel control process (step S407, see FIG. 15). If the time from the start to the constant speed is uniform, when starting the acceleration of the reel (step S607, see FIG. 17), a timer corresponding to the time is set, and in step S407, the It may be configured to wait until the time corresponding to the timer value elapses. Even with such a configuration, it is clear that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

(89) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the present invention will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

Game machine A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 after stopping Migration preparation processing function S412) in
When the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the pattern, the pseudo game second end means (main controller 101 Simulated game flag clear function S1004) during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R) can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the control by the second pseudo-game ending means is performed, the pseudo-game is terminated without the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means being pseudo-stopped.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo-game is executed when a specific condition is established. In the pseudo-game, the cyclic display of patterns is started, and the cyclic display of the patterns of the corresponding cyclic display means when the stop operation means is operated is stopped in a pseudo manner. Then, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns, the quasi-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the cyclic display means, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game. Therefore, in this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the pseudo-game is terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game from declining the willingness to play when the pseudo-game is started.

Furthermore, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means is not quasi-stopped, and the patterns of the cyclic display means are displayed. The pseudo-game is finished while the cyclic display of is continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game cannot be grasped unless the stop operation means is operated in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to encourage the user to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine A2. In the gaming machine A1, the second start control means (main control unit 101 acceleration start in the main game) for performing control to start the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo game Processing function (S607), stepping motor control processing function (S106), and when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the cyclic display of the pattern, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. A second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main controller 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the cyclic display means, and the privilege giving means is the second stop A gaming machine, wherein the privilege is given based on a control result by a control means.

According to this game machine, the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo game is restarted, and the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Then, a privilege is given based on the result of stopping the pattern. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the cyclic display of patterns is not stopped at the stage of starting the next game cycle. In addition, in such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the pattern and the pseudo-game ends, the control by the second start control means is not performed. It becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine A3. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine A2 comprises a pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is being executed when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, even if the pseudo-game ends without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern, the player cannot understand whether it is a pseudo-game or a game related to awarding of benefits. It is possible to avoid disappearing.

Game machine A4. In the game machine A2 or the game machine A3, the pseudo-game executing means, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, circulates the patterns. A gaming machine comprising deceleration means for decelerating display for a predetermined time.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is slowed down for a predetermined time. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over by reducing the speed of cyclic display of the symbols.

Game machine A5. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means is configured such that when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the Specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 performed through step S1003 of the main controller 101, stepping motor control A game machine characterized by comprising a processing function S106).

According to the game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has quasi-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is performed so as to quasi-stop the cyclic display of all the patterns. A cyclic display means is controlled. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the specific operation means to stop the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means. It is possible to end the game.

Game machine A6. In the game machine A5, the specific stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stop mode different from the case where the quasi-stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of patterns, the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of patterns is stopped by the stop operation means. The cyclic display of patterns is quasi-stopped in a stop mode different from when is operated. With such a configuration, when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the specific operation means, and when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the stop operation means, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game. Become. As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, and it is possible for the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine A7. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game execution means is configured such that when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third end means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that performs the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine A8. In the gaming machine A7, the second start control means performs control to start the cyclic display of the symbols of the cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of the symbols when the pseudo-game ends. game machine.

According to this game machine, when there is a cyclic display means that has stopped the cyclic display of patterns when the pseudo game is finished, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means is started. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game related to giving a privilege using all of the cyclic display means.

Game machine A9. In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the pattern cyclic display speed when controlled by the start control means and the pattern cyclic display speed when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the pattern cyclic display speed in the pseudo game and the pattern cyclic display speed in the game related to awarding of the privilege are equal. With such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, etc., it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. It becomes possible.

Game machine A10. In any one of the game machines A1 to A9, determination means (of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant a specific privilege (addition of the net increase counter) different from the privilege granted by the privilege granting means A gaming machine comprising an additional lottery winning confirmation function (S1804), wherein the specific condition is established when the determination means determines that the specific privilege is to be granted.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific privilege different from the privilege given by the privilege giving means is to be given, the specific condition is established and the pseudo-game is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the pseudo-game a game for notifying that the specific privilege is given, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Game machine A11. In the gaming machine A10, when the pseudo-stop result of the symbols becomes a specific stop result (a combination of "red 7" symbols is stopped on the middle line L2) under the control of the pseudo-stop control means, the specific privilege is provided, and if the pseudo stop result of the pattern does not result in the specific stop result, provision notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that does not notify that the specific privilege is provided is provided. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game becomes the specific stop result, it is notified that the specific privilege is given. On the other hand, when the pseudo-stop result of the pattern does not result in the specific stop result in the pseudo-game, it is not reported that the specific privilege is given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prompt a player who wants to be notified of the provision of the specific privilege to operate the stop operation means, and to allow a player who does not need to be notified of the provision of the specific privilege to operate the specific operation means. It becomes possible.

Game machine A12. In the gaming machine A11, there is an advantageous state transition means (announcement mode transition function S1608 of the main controller 101) that shifts to an advantageous state (notification mode) that is advantageous to the player, and a number of games that can be played under the advantageous state. and a number information storage means (net increase number counter of the main controller 101) for storing information (remaining number of payouts), and the specific privilege is a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. A game machine characterized by being.

According to this gaming machine, as the specific privilege, a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is provided. By adopting such a configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated in the pseudo-game, it is possible to avoid any disadvantage to the player.

It should be noted that the "privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under an advantageous state" corresponds to a privilege that increases the number of games if the advantageous state ends based on the number of games played. If the advantageous state ends based on the number of given game media, the benefit of increasing the number of given game media is applicable.

Game machine A13. In any one of the game machines A1 to A12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this game machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if the player repeatedly hits the start operation means when starting the game, the pseudo-game ends despite the fact that the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo-game. This is because an event that causes

Game machine B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 after stopping Migration preparation processing function S412) in
A pseudo-game second end means (pseudo-game end function based on the cancel operation of the main control device 101) for ending the pseudo-game when the second specific condition (operation of the settlement switch 59) is satisfied is configured to be executable. ,
Second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of main controller 101, stepping motor a control processing function S106);
A second stop control means ( Equipped with a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106) in this game of the main control device 101,
The gaming machine, wherein the pseudo-game second end means executes different processes according to the pseudo-stop status of the cyclic display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo-game is executed when a specific condition is established. In the pseudo-game, the cyclic display of patterns is started, and the cyclic display of the patterns of the corresponding cyclic display means when the stop operation means is operated is stopped in a pseudo manner. Then, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns, the quasi-game ends. By making such a pseudo game executable, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the cyclic display means, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the pseudo-game is configured to end even when the second specific condition is satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the pseudo-game is terminated, the pseudo-circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied is simulated. The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the stop status. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo game according to the pseudo stop situation of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine B2. In the game machine B1, the second specific condition is satisfied when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated, and the privilege granting means is controlled based on the control result of the second stop control means. A game machine characterized in that a privilege is provided, and the pseudo-game second end means executes different processing according to the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

According to this game machine, the pseudo-game is configured to end even when the specific operation means is operated, and when the specific operation means is operated to end the pseudo-game, before the specific operation means is operated The configuration is such that different processing is executed according to the number of operated stop operation means. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game according to the situation in which the specific operation means is operated.

Game machine B3. In the game machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means terminates the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the stop operating means that is not operated. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated, the pseudo-game is ended without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the non-operated stop operation means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game cannot be grasped unless the stop operation means is operated in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to encourage the user to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means for the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

Game machine B4. A game machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game notifying means (auxiliary display unit 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is the pseudo-game when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game in the gaming machine B3. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With such a configuration, even if the pseudo-game can be completed without the pseudo-stop of the cyclic display of the pattern, the player can decide whether it is a pseudo-game or a game related to awarding of benefits. It is possible to avoid being lost.

Game machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or gaming machine B4, when there are a plurality of cyclic display means for quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the symbols in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means for quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the symbols is the cyclic display means for simulating the circulation of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) relating to timing for starting display.

According to this gaming machine, when there are a plurality of cyclic display means that quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns in a pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that quasi-stops the cyclic display of patterns is related to the timing of starting the cyclic display of patterns. Timing information is set individually. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B6. In the game machine B5, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo-game to the start of the cyclic display of the patterns. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the stopping result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B7. In any one of the game machines B3 to B6, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is continued for a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine characterized in that a deceleration means for decelerating is provided.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns is slowed down for a predetermined period of time. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the pseudo-game is over by reducing the speed of cyclic display of the symbols.

Game machine B8. In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the cyclic display speed of the pattern when controlled by the start control means and the cyclic display speed of the pattern when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the pattern cyclic display speed in the pseudo game and the pattern cyclic display speed in the game related to awarding of the privilege are equal. With such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, etc., it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. It becomes possible.

Game machine B9. In the gaming machine B2, the pseudo-game second end means is configured to pseudo-stop all the cyclic display of the pattern when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one of the stop operation means is operated. It is characterized by comprising specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed through step S1003 of the main controller 101) that controls the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the pattern. game machine.

According to the game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means is operated, the cyclic display means for performing the cyclic display of the patterns to pseudo-stop all the cyclic display of the patterns. controlled. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means in the middle of the pseudo-game can operate the specific operation means to stop the pseudo-game without operating the stop operation means. It is possible to end the game.

Game machine B10. In the gaming machine B9, the specific stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the patterns in a stop mode different from the case where the quasi-stop control means quasi-stops the cyclical display of the patterns. game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means is operated, the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is displayed in the same manner as when the stop operation means is operated. simulates the cyclic display of patterns in a different stopping mode. With such a configuration, when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the specific operation means, and when the pseudo-game is ended by operating the stop operation means, it is possible to change the end mode of the pseudo-game. Become. As a result, it is possible to clarify the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means, and it is possible for the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine B11. In the game machine B9 or the game machine B10, when all the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of the patterns in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that has quasi-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns is the cyclic display of the patterns. A gaming machine characterized by comprising timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) relating to timing for starting display.

According to this gaming machine, when all of the cyclic display means quasi-stop the cyclic display of patterns in the pseudo-game, the cyclic display means that quasi-stops the cyclic display of the patterns is related to the timing of starting the cyclic display of the patterns. Timing information is set individually. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo-stop result of the pattern in the pseudo-game will be the operation assistance of the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B12. In the game machine B11, the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo-game to the start of the cyclic display of the patterns. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game will serve as an operation assistance for the stop operation means in the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine B13. In any one of the game machines B2 to B12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this game machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the specific operation means. For example, it is possible to use the start operation means as the specific operation means, but if the player repeatedly hits the start operation means when starting the game, the pseudo-game ends despite the fact that the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo-game. This is because an event that causes

Game machine C1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop operation determination means (main controller) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern and the cyclic display of the pattern becomes constant speed 101 stop command confirmation function S1008);
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, the second stop control means for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to stop the cyclic display of the pattern (stop of the main controller 101 in this game Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
The privilege granting means is configured to grant the privilege based on the control result of the second stop control means,
The second stop control means causes the stop operation means to be operated in a prescribed operation method (operating order for establishing a bell prize) when the result of the lottery for the winning combination is a prescribed result (bell winning in order of pushing). and controlling the plurality of cyclic display means so that a prescribed winning (bell winning) is established and the stop operating means is operated by an operation method other than the prescribed operating method so that the prescribed winning is not established,
providing an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of informing the specified operation method when the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result;
The operation method notification means, when notifying the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means is operated When notifying the prescribed operation method in the game round that executes the pseudo-game, the pseudo-stop control means in the pseudo-game after all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means is pseudo-stopped and, before the second start control means starts the control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns, the prescribed operation method is notified.

According to this game machine, when notifying the prescribed operation method in a game cycle in which the pseudo-game is not executed, the stop operation determination means is configured to notify the prescribed operation method before determining whether the stop operation means is operated. did. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to operate the stop operation means after grasping the prescribed operation method in game rounds in which no pseudo-game is executed.

Further, when notifying the prescribed operation method in the game round in which the pseudo-game is executed, after the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means in the pseudo-game, the second start The prescribed operation method is notified before the control means starts the control for starting the cyclic display of the pattern. By adopting such a configuration, while avoiding that the stop operation means is operated by the stipulated operation method in the pseudo-game, the stop operation means is operated by an operation method different from the stipulated operation method in the game related to the provision of benefits after the pseudo-game. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a privilege is not granted due to the establishment of a prescribed prize due to the operation.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine C2. In the game machine C1, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method in a game round in which the pseudo-game is not executed, after the cyclic display of all the patterns of the cyclic display means reaches a constant speed, the A game machine characterized by notifying a prescribed operation method.

According to this gaming machine, when notifying the specified operation method in a game cycle in which no pseudo-game is executed, after the cyclic display of all the patterns of the cyclic display means becomes a constant speed, the stop operation determination means Before it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, the specified operation method is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding different between the game round in which the pseudo-game is executed and the game round in which the pseudo-game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the prescribed operation method is notified before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding of the privilege is changed depending on whether or not the pseudo game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Game machine C3. In the game machine C1 or the game machine C2, when the pseudo-stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result. When the specified determination means (winning combination confirmation function S603 of the main controller 101) and the specified determination means determine that the result of the lottery for the combination is the specified result, the specified operation method is notified to the operation method notification means. and time information setting means for setting time information (main a delay time acquisition function (S605) of the control device 101, and the second start control means sets the time information when the pseudo stop control means has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means. A game machine characterized by performing control to start the cyclic display of the pattern after the time corresponding to the time information set by the means has passed.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the role is a specified result, and the lottery result of the role is determined. When it is determined that the specified result is obtained, the operation method notification means is caused to notify the specified operation method, and when the operation method notification means is caused to notify the specified operation method, the time information is set. Then, the second start control means controls to start the cyclic display of the patterns after the elapse of the time corresponding to the time information when the pseudo stop control means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means. conduct. With this configuration, in the pseudo-game, when notifying the specified operation method after all the circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the pattern, the notification of the specified operation method is performed before the cycle display of the pattern is started. It is possible to execute

Game machine C4. Any one of the game machines C1 to C3 includes at least the pseudo game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, and supervises the game. Main control means (main control device 101) to manage and subordinate control means (display control device 81) to perform various controls under the control of the main control means, and the main control means controls the operation method notification means A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to this game machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means for overall management of the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event in which it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated before the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method.

Game machine C5. In any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is performed, the pseudo game ends without the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means being pseudo-stopped, and the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated. (2) a game machine characterized in that said operation method notification means is configured to notify said specified operation method.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing cyclic display of patterns, the pseudo-game can be terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who feels troublesome to operate the stop operation means in the pseudo-game from declining the willingness to play when the pseudo-game is started.

Further, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the cyclic display means are cyclically displaying the patterns, the quasi-game ends without quasi-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclical display means. The operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method before the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo-game to a game related to awarding of benefits, while reducing the chance of operating the stop operation means with an operation method different from the prescribed operation method in the game related to awarding privileges. It becomes possible to

Game machine D1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means (pseudo-game stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
Second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of main controller 101) for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the combination ) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the pseudo game A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set during the execution of .

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding is set during execution of the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine D2. In the gaming machine D1, stop operation determination means (a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the patterns. ), wherein the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated.

According to this game machine, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated. With this configuration, even if the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo-game, the time required for the stop operation determination means to determine the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo-game It is possible to achieve shortening.

Game machine D3. In the game machine D2, the stop information setting means sets stop information such that the pattern attached to one predetermined specific position is pseudo-stopped at the specified position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the game machine, the stop information setting means sets the stop information such that the pattern attached to one predetermined specific position is pseudo-stopped at the specified position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. do. In this way, even if the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, the pseudo stop result of the pattern in the pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop operation means. It is possible to suppress the delay from the operation of the stop operation means until the cyclic display of the pattern of the corresponding cyclic display means is stopped in a pseudo manner.

Game machine D4. In the game machine D2 or the game machine D3, the second stop control means is controlled to stop the cyclic display of the pattern during a period from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined time elapses. and the pseudo-stop control means is configured to be capable of performing control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern after the specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the game related to awarding of a privilege, control is performed to stop the cyclic display of patterns during a period from when the stop operation means is operated to when the predetermined specified time elapses. On the other hand, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to perform control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of patterns after a specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time for setting the stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, the time for determining the stop position of the cyclic display means based on the stop information, and the like. becomes possible.

Game machine D5. In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second stop information setting means causes the start control means to start cyclic display of the pattern when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set later and before the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of the privilege is after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the patterns, and the pseudo stop control means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns. It is set before performing control to let By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

Game machine D6. In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, stop operation determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the patterns. The second stop information setting means includes a pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008), and when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation determination means determines whether the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set before determination is made.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of the privilege is set before the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

Game machine D7. In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means, and it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. .

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine D9. In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine E1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
The pseudo game execution means is
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101) for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated, the pseudo stop control means (stop in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) that controls the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo stop the cyclic display of the pattern Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 A preparation processing function S412) is provided,
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
Second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of main controller 101) for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the combination ) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means The stop information is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether or not the operation is performed, and the second stop information setting means determines whether the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. In this case, the second stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether the stop operation means has been operated. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether the stop operation means is operated, and is used in the game related to awarding the privilege. 2 Stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege, as compared with the configuration in which the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game is finished.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine E2. In the gaming machine E1, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, the specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is the specific result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo-game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits, and reduce the amount of data prepared in advance. It is possible to plan

Game machine E3. In the gaming machine E1 or gaming machine E2, the stop information setting means, when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game, the stop information setting means after the start control means starts controlling the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine characterized by setting information in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area after starting the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start cyclic display of patterns when executing a pseudo-game.

Game machine E4. In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means, and it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege. .

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine E5. In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the pseudo-game executing means, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation in which at least one cyclic display means quasi-stops the cyclic display of the pattern, the pattern a third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of (1).

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding the privilege.

On the other hand, if the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it takes time to set the second stop information. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in the case of setting the second stop information during execution of the pseudo-game, it is possible to preferably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine F1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. Privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.);
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established,
When performing the pseudo-game, start control means for controlling the plurality of cyclic display means to start the cyclic display of the pattern (acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo-game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106 )When,
When the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the cyclic display of the pattern, a pseudo-stop control means (main control means) for controlling the corresponding cyclic display means to pseudo-stop the cyclic display of the pattern Stop position determination processing function S1009 in the pseudo game of the device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means, pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after stopping all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 preparation processing function S412);
Control for starting the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that has not started the cyclic display of the patterns when the pseudo-game is not executed and when the cyclic display of the patterns is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
A second stop control means ( Stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means controls;
a second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
Stop operation determination means for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means executing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated (pseudo stop command confirmation function and stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) and
The privilege granting means grants the privilege based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means, when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means The stop information is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether or not the operation is performed, and the second stop information setting means determines whether the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. When doing so, the second stop information is stored in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether the stop operation means has been operated after the pseudo game is completed. A game machine characterized by setting.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a pseudo-game, a game related to privilege provision is executed after the pseudo-game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts the determination of whether the stop operation means is operated, and is used in the game related to awarding the privilege. 2 stop information is set in the first storage area from the end of the pseudo-game to before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With such a configuration, in a pseudo-game, it is possible to pseudo-stop the cyclical display of patterns using the stop information, and in a game related to awarding of benefits, the cyclical display of patterns is performed using the second stop information. It is possible to stop.

Further, by setting the second stop information in the first storage area in which the stop information is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity prepared in advance.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine F2. In the game machine F1, the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first storage area to the second stop information.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-game ends, the stop information set in the first storage area is rewritten to the second stop information. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the first storage area.

Game machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. A gaming machine characterized by setting

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, the specific second stop information set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is the specific result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo-game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits, and reduce the amount of data prepared in advance. It is possible to plan

Game machine F4. In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the stop information setting means determines that, when the pseudo-game executing means executes the pseudo-game, the start control means has started controlling the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine, wherein the stop information is set in the first storage area later.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo-game is set in the first storage area after starting the cyclic display of the pattern in the pseudo-game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start cyclic display of patterns when executing a pseudo-game.

Game machine F5. In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the pseudo-game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns. In the case, the pseudo-game second end means for ending the pseudo-game (pseudo-game flag clear function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101), and the control by the pseudo-game second end means is carried out, the pseudo-game is finished without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all the cyclic display means are performing the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means does not stop, and the pseudo-game can be started. finish. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for the control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer needed. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Game machine F6. In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the pseudo-game execution means operates the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) in a situation where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the pattern. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising third pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a state where at least one cyclic display means has stopped the cyclic display of the patterns, the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means that is performing the cyclic display of the patterns is performed. end the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping. With such a configuration, at least the cyclic display means that cyclically displays the patterns can be controlled by the second stop control means without going through the control by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. becomes. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for the control by the pseudo stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer needed. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo-game to the game related to awarding of the privilege.

Note that the game machine group A to the game machine group C may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. In addition, the game machine group A to the game machine group C may be appropriately combined with the game machine group D to the game machine group F, and even when they are combined, the above-described effects can be obtained.

Game machine G1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
stop operation determination means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means and the corresponding cyclic display means stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of main controller 101) for determining the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns when the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means. (stepping motor control processing S106 of the main controller 101),
The stop operation determination means is used for the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position to before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. 2, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated,
Based on the fact that the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, standby processing execution means (100 msec of the main controller 101 A game machine characterized by providing a standby function S2210).

According to this game machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operating means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is operated, and if the stop operating means is operated, the corresponding cyclic display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. Then, when the cyclic display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position by the stop position determination means and before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop operation means can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if it is configured to determine the operation of other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of patterns to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a state where the cyclic display of patterns has not stopped. New problems such as becoming may arise. Therefore, in this gaming machine, a standby process of waiting for a predetermined predetermined time is performed based on the stop position determination means determining the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and the above concerns can be resolved favorably.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine G2. The gaming machine G1 includes stop position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. The waiting process executing means performs the waiting process after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. machine.

According to the game machine, the stop position determination means for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, After determining that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, standby processing is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Game machine G3. In the game machine G2, the stop position determination means can determine a position different from the cyclic display position of the cyclic display means when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means is operated as the stop position. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this game machine, the cyclic display of patterns may not stop immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, since the time from when the stop operation means is operated until the cyclic display of the pattern of the corresponding cyclic display means stops fluctuates, the standby process is performed in consideration of the time. In this case, there is a concern that the time until the next game round can be started may be delayed. However, when this configuration is applied to the game machine G2, it is possible to set the waiting time in the waiting process without considering the time required for the cyclic display means to reach the stop position. It is possible to preferably solve the above concern.

Game machine G4. In the game machine G2 or G3, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, all of the stop operation means are operated. Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation second determination means is provided, and the standby process execution means is configured such that the stop operation second determination means A gaming machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that none of the gaming machines have been operated.

According to this game machine, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, it is determined whether or not all of the stop operation means have been operated. The stop operation second determination means is provided, and the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop operation second determination means determines that all of the stop operation means are not operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started even in the case of the configuration in which the standby process is performed, and the next game round can be started. It is possible to improve the operability when For example, without providing the stop operation second determination means, the standby process may be performed after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. It is possible. However, in the case of such a configuration, depending on whether the timing at which the player ends the operation of all the stop operation means is after the waiting process or during the waiting process, the following This is because the time required until the game round can be started will change. Then, if the time required until the next game round can be started changes, an event occurs in which even if the player performs an operation for starting the next game round, the operation is not accepted, This is because the operability at the time of starting the next game round is lowered.

Game machine G5. In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the standby process executing means performs the standby process before the privilege granting means grants the privilege.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process is performed before the privilege granting means grants the privilege. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which a privilege is given in a situation where the cyclic display of patterns is not stopped.

Game machine G6. In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, winning determination means (a payout determination processing function of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the aforementioned combination has been established. ), wherein the standby process executing means performs the standby process before the winning determination means performs the winning determination.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process is performed before the winning determination means performs the winning determination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated, and to create a situation in which the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped while the standby processing is being performed.

Game machine G7. In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, when the lottery result of the combination is a specified result (push order bell win), the stop operation means performs a specified operation method (an operation capable of establishing a bell winning). The plurality of cyclic display means are operated so that a prescribed winning (bell winning) is established when the operation is performed in the order), and the prescribed winning is not established when the stop operation means is operated by an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. Controlling stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of main controller 101), and operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout A gaming machine characterized by comprising a number display section 62).

According to this gaming machine, when the lottery result of the winning combination is the specified result, the specified operation method may be notified by the operation method notification means. At this time, when the stop operation means is operated by the specified operation method, the specified winning can be established. By applying any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6 to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of the player unintentionally operating the stop operation means in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. It becomes possible.

Game machine G8. The game machine G7 is provided with notification control means (main controller 101) for controlling the operation method notification means, and the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the prescribed operation method, the stop operation is performed. After the position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, the notification by the operation method notification means is terminated, and the standby processing execution means causes the notification control means to stop notification by the operation method notification means. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after the game is terminated.

According to this game machine, when the operation method notification means notifies the specified operation method, the stop position determination means ends the notification by the operation method notification means after all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means are determined, Standby processing is then performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process while promptly ending the notification by the operation method notification means.

Game machine G9. In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a normal process executing means (main controller 101) that is activated when the power is turned on and repeats a series of normal processes, and that periodically interrupts the normal process. interrupt processing execution means (main controller 101) for performing interrupt processing, and the normal processing execution means includes the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby process execution means. The interrupt process execution means has the stop means, and the normal process execution means has a predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop position determination means has not determined the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the stop position is determined, means for determining whether or not the predetermined cyclic display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means is deficient.

According to this game machine, in the normal process that is repeatedly performed when the power is turned on, the cyclic display means for performing the cyclic display of the pattern and the corresponding stop operation means are operated. When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop position of the cyclic display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means is determined. A process of determining is performed. On the other hand, in the normal process, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of the predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means have not been determined, the predetermined cyclic display means determines the stop position determination means. It is not determined whether or not the stop position determined by 1 is reached. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Game machine G10. In any one of the game machines G1 to G9, the cyclic display means includes a circulating body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) that circulates in the circumferential direction and is provided with a plurality of patterns in the circumferential direction; and a driving means (stepping motor) for driving the revolving body.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display means includes a circulating body that circulates in the circumferential direction and that has a plurality of types of patterns in the circumferential direction, and a driving means that drives the circulating body. In such a configuration, it is conceivable that when the driving of the drive means is stopped, the revolving body may swing without immediately ending the revolving. However, in the case of performing a standby process of waiting for a predetermined time, it is possible to end the oscillation of the orbiting body while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine H1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
A slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control of the main control means,
The main control means is
stop operation determination means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated, the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means and the corresponding cyclic display means stop position determination means (stop pattern number determination function S2305 of main controller 101) for determining the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns when the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the patterns reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means. (stepping motor control processing S106 of the main controller 101),
The stop operation determination means is used for the period from when the stop position determination means determines the stop position to before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. 2, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated,
After the stop position determining means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, a stop for determining whether or not all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of main controller 101);
When the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, the first information indicating the determination result of the stop position determination means (all reel stop completion command) to the slave control means (all reel stop completion command transmission function S2205 of the main control device 101);
Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means has determined all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. When,
When the stop operation second determination means determines that none of the stop operation means is operated, second information (operation end command) indicating the determination result of the stop operation second determination means is sent to the slave control means A game machine characterized by comprising a second transmission means (operation end command transmission function S2207 of the main controller 101) for transmission.

According to this game machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operating means corresponding to the cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern is operated, and if the stop operating means is operated, the corresponding cyclic display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. Then, when the cyclic display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means, the cyclic display of the pattern is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position by the stop position determination means and before the stop means stops the cyclic display of the patterns of the cyclic display means which is performing the cyclic display of the patterns. It is configured such that it is possible to determine whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the other cyclic display means performing the cyclic display of the pattern has been operated. With such a configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, the operability of the stop operation means can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which the operation determination of the other stop operation means is performed without waiting for the cyclic display of the pattern to stop, for example, while the operation of all the stop operation means is completed, for example, the second The cyclic display of the pattern of the cyclic display means whose stop position has been determined has not been completed, or the operation of at least one stop operation means has not been completed while the cyclic display of the patterns of all the cyclic display means has been completed. new problems such as Then, when the above-described problem arises, a problem arises in the control performed on the side of the slave control means. Therefore, in this game machine, after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means on the main control means side, all of the plurality of cyclic display means are the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. When it is determined that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the first information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. . Further, on the main control means side, after the stop position determination means has determined the stop positions of all of the plurality of cyclic display means, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and if none of the stop operation means has been operated. When the determination is made, the second information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. With such a configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the circulating display status of patterns by receiving the first information, and can control the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. It is possible to perform control according to As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine H2. In the game machine H1, the second transmission means transmits the second information after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after transmitting the first information. With such a configuration, after the slave control means performs control according to all of the plurality of cyclic display means reaching the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, all the operations of the stop operation means are completed. It is possible to perform control in accordance with what has been done. Furthermore, since the main control means includes the stop position determination means, the maximum time required for the cyclic display means to actually reach the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position is It can be grasped or predicted on the instrument side. On the other hand, the time required until all the stop operation means are not operated depends on the player's operation, and therefore cannot be grasped and predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted, for example, the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of patterns and the timing when the slave control means receives the first information It is possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on .

Game machine H3. In the gaming machine H2, the stop operation second determination means performs the stop operation after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. A game machine characterized by determining whether or not a means is operated.

According to this game machine, the stop operation second determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. judge. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine H4. In the game machine H3, the second stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmission means transmits the first information.

According to this game machine, the stop operation second determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmission means transmits the first information. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the slave control means to quickly grasp that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and all of the plurality of cyclic display means can be displayed. It is possible to reduce the deviation between the timing when the cyclic display of the pattern ends and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information.

Game machine H5. In any one of the game machines H2 to H4, the sub-control means controls when a specific condition (additional lottery winning) is established, when all of the plurality of cyclic display means end the cyclic display of the pattern. , Effect control means (display control device 81 A game machine characterized by comprising an additional notification processing function).

According to this gaming machine, the slave control means, when a specific condition is established, when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of patterns, and when all the operations of the stop operation means have completed, An auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute different auxiliary performances. In such a configuration, depending on whether all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of the patterns or the operation of all the stop operation means has been completed, whichever occurs first, for example, a well-prepared auxiliary Problems such as one of the performances being unable to be executed or the processing configuration of the performance control means being complicated and the storage capacity being increased may occur. However, the main control means transmits first information indicating that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and notifies that none of the stop operation means has been operated. By transmitting the second information indicating the second information, the slave control means can grasp that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have completed the cyclic display of the pattern through the reception of the first information. It is possible to grasp that all the operations of the stop operation means have been completed through the reception of . Further, since the main control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the sub-control means performs control to execute a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then the second information. Based on the reception of , control may be performed to execute an auxiliary effect different from the predetermined auxiliary effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine H6. In the game machine H5, the effect control means controls the auxiliary effect means to execute a first auxiliary effect (third notification sound) when the first information is received when the specific condition is established. and controlling the auxiliary effect means to execute a second auxiliary effect (announcement of the number of coins to be added) when the second information is received.

According to this game machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first auxiliary effect is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary effect is executed when the second information is received. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which one of the carefully prepared first assistance effect and the second assistance effect cannot be executed.

Game machine H7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine H6, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices.

According to this gaming machine, the first auxiliary effect and the second auxiliary effect are executed by different devices. By adopting such a configuration, even when the interval between the reception of the first information and the reception of the second information is short, it is possible to reliably execute the first assistance effect. .

Game machine H8. In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the main control means determines a predetermined time ( 100 msec) standby processing execution means (100 msec standby function S2210 of the main controller 101) for performing standby processing, and the standby processing execution means is such that the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means are stopped. A gaming machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after it is determined that the stop position determined by the position determining means is reached.

According to this game machine, when the stop position determining means has determined all the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means, the waiting process of waiting for a predetermined predetermined time is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which all the cyclic display of patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of new problems such as

Further, the standby process execution means performs the standby process after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of cyclic display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. It is possible to suppress the delay.

Game machine H9. In the gaming machine H8, the standby process execution means transmits the second information to the sub-control means after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the sub-control means. A gaming machine characterized by performing the standby process after transmitting to the means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby process execution means, after the first transmission means has transmitted the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means has transmitted the second information to the slave control means, Perform standby processing. With such a configuration, there is a difference between the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means finish cyclically displaying the patterns and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the first information, It is possible to reduce the difference between the timing when the player ends the operation of the stop operation means and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on the reception of the second information. Moreover, since the waiting time in the waiting process can be set in consideration of the time required for transmitting the first information, etc., it is possible to shorten the waiting time in the waiting process.

It should be noted that the game machine group G and the game machine group H may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. Further, the game machine group A to the game machine group F may be appropriately combined with the game machine group G and the game machine group H, and even in the case of combination, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Gaming machine I1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
Specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (rotation start header information, etc.);
A storage area (pseudo-game flag storage area) for storing different information when it is a specific game (pseudo-game) and when it is not the specific game,
command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
Command creation means for creating the command (header creation function S3002, body creation function S3005, footer creation function S3006, etc.),
The command creating means comprises a specified command creating means (header creating function S3002, etc.) for creating a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating the specific information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area where different information is stored depending on whether it is a specific game or not. . With such a configuration, the sub-control means can grasp whether or not it is a specific game through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the sub-control means to perform control according to whether or not it is a specific game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance commands to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and commands to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. becomes.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and a command to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game are stored in advance, it is possible to determine whether the command is a specific game when transmitting the command. It becomes necessary to perform determination processing, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether or not it is a specific game, so the above process is not necessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Gaming machine I2. In the gaming machine I1, the prescribed command generating means, in both the case of the specific game and the case of the non-specific game, includes the specific information, the information stored in the storage area, A gaming machine characterized by creating a prescribed command by calculating

According to this gaming machine, in both the case of a specific game and the case of a non-specific game, the prescribed command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. . With such a configuration, the process of determining whether or not the game is a specific game is not required when a command is transmitted, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine I3. In the game machine I1 or I2, the game machine is characterized in that the defined command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by computing the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not the game is a specific game in the header. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Gaming machine I4. A game machine according to the game machine I3, wherein the header is contained in one byte.

According to this game machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is stored in one byte. can be grasped.

Game machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or gaming machine I4, the header comprises a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating a command type, and whether or not it is the specific game. and a specific game storage bit for storing information indicating whether the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. Characteristic game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating the command type, and information indicating whether or not it is a specific game. The specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in a bit that was not used in the past, and commands to be transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means can be stored. Redundancy can be suitably suppressed.

Game machine I6. In the gaming machine I5, the gaming machine is characterized in that the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the specific game storage bits are unused areas. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. .

Game machine I7. A game machine according to any one of the game machines I3 to I6, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether or not it is a specific game is created by calculating header information including information indicating a command type and information stored in a storage area. be. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header of the command to be transmitted in the case of a specific game and the header of the command to be transmitted in the case of a non-specific game, so that the amount of data can be reduced. It is possible to plan

Game machine I8. In any of the game machines I1 to I7, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, the first execution means ( Pseudo-game flag set function S504) and when the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is changed to the second information (00H) Second execution means (pseudo-game flag clear function S611), confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and the confirmation means put the first information in the storage area a specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the specific game when it is confirmed that the is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the storage area. is changed to the second information. Then, when the confirming means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used for determining whether or not to execute a specific game, in addition to creating the specified command, thereby suppressing an increase in the storage capacity. becomes possible.

Game machine I9. In any one of the game machines I1 to I8, when information indicating that the specific game is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and the specific game is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine, wherein the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine when information indicating that the game is not played is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the information indicating that the specific game is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the information indicating that the specific game is not stored in the storage area. In this case, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the information stored in the storage area has a function as information used when creating a prescribed command and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. , can be given. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Gaming machine I10. In any one of the game machines I1 to I9, the game machine is characterized in that the specific game is a pseudo game.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make the sub-control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game through the prescribed command.

Game machine I11. In any one of the game machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a game in a specific game state.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make the sub-control means grasp whether or not the game is in the specific game state through the prescribed command.

Game machine J1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
When the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo-game lottery winning) is established, the first execution means (pseudo-game flag set function S504) for storing the first information (40H) in the storage area (pseudo-game flag storage area) When,
When the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is established after the first specific condition is established, the information stored in the storage area is changed to the second information (00H) Second execution means (clear pseudo-game flag function S611);
Confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.),
Different control is performed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. Control execution means to be executed (pseudo game execution function),
and setting means for setting corresponding information (rotation start header) using at least part of the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the storage area. is changed to the second information. Different control is executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. . Corresponding information is set using at least part of the information stored in the storage area. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for determination when executing control, but also for setting correspondence information, so that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Become.

As a result, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine J2. In the gaming machine J1, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, and the confirmation means A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the second information is stored in a storage area, the specific game is not executed.

According to this gaming machine, when it is confirmed that the first information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed. game is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a specific game is to be executed based on the information stored in the storage area, and to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not a particular game is to be executed. .

Game machine J3. In the game machine J1 or the game machine J2, specific information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) and command transmission means (command transmission processing) for transmitting commands to the slave control means. 3, etc.), and the setting means includes a specified command creation means (header creating means) for creating a specified command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specified information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function S3002, etc.).

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the specified information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area in which different information is stored depending on whether the first specified condition and the second specified condition are satisfied, the prescribed command is created. With such a configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether or not each specific condition is satisfied through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it is possible to cause the sub-control means to perform control according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance a command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and a command to be transmitted when the second information is stored. can be reduced.

Further, in the configuration in which the command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and the command to be transmitted when the second information is stored are stored in advance, the confirmation means is used when the command is transmitted. , and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this game machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include which of the first information and the second information is stored, so the confirmation process is unnecessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine J4. In the gaming machine J3, the prescribed command creating means, both when the first information is stored in the storage area and when the second information is stored in the storage area, A gaming machine, wherein a specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, both when the first information is stored in the storage area and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific information and the information stored in the storage area are create a prescribed command by computing the information; With such a configuration, when a command is transmitted, there is no need to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the storage area. reduction can be achieved.

Game machine J5. In the game machine J3 or J4, the game machine is characterized in that the defined command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied in the header. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine J6. A gaming machine according to the gaming machine J5, characterized in that the header is accommodated in 1 byte.

According to this game machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, and the header is stored in one byte. It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or J6, the header comprises: a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header; a type storage bit storing information indicating a command type; 2 a specific condition storage bit for storing information indicating whether or not a specific condition is established, and the specific condition storage bit is positioned lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A game machine characterized by being provided in.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information indicating the command type, and whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met. The specific condition storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not each specific condition is established in a bit that was conventionally not used, and commands transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means become redundant. It is possible to suitably suppress to do.

Game machine J8. In the gaming machine J7 described above, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and an area other than a position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. .

Game machine J9. A gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines J5 to J8, wherein the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, the header including the information indicating whether or not each specific condition is satisfied is created by calculating the header information including the information indicating the command type and the information stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the header to be transmitted when the first information is stored and the header to be transmitted when the second information is stored. can be reduced.

Game machine J10. In any one of the game machines J1 to J9, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the game machine when the first information is stored in the storage area, and stores the second information in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that when information is stored, the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine. No output. With such a configuration, the information stored in the storage area is provided with a function as information used when executing control and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Game machine K1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
In a gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) for transmitting a command to the slave control means;
Information storage means (ROM 105) for pre-storing first command information (stop header information, etc.) to be transmitted to the sub-control means in the case of the first game (main game);
When executing a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game, a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H),
In the case of the second game, command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) for creating second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, the first command information to be transmitted to the sub-control means in the case of the first game is stored in advance, and when the second game different from the first game is to be executed, the stored command information is stored. Second game information is stored in the area. Then, in the case of the second game, the second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to transmit the second command information to the sub-control means when the second game is being played, depending on whether it is the first game or the second game. It is possible to cause the slave control means to perform the same control.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Moreover, in such a configuration, it is not necessary to store the second command information in advance in the main control means, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K2. The game machine K1 is characterized in that the first game information (00H) is stored in the storage area when the first game is executed.

According to this gaming machine, when executing the first game, the first game information is stored in the storage area. With such a configuration, there is no need to separately provide a storage area for storing the first game information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K3. In the game machine K2, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is established, the first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) for storing the second game information in the storage area , When the second specific condition (pseudo-game end) is established after the first specific condition is established, second execution means (pseudo-game flag clear) for changing the information stored in the storage area to the first game information Function S611), confirmation means for confirming information stored in the storage area (pseudo-game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area In this case, when the first game execution means (this game execution function) for executing the first game and the confirmation means confirm that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game is executed. and a second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing the game machine.

According to this game machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area. The information is changed to the first game information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area, the first game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game information is stored in the storage area. 2 games are executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for generating the second command information but also for determining whether the first game or the second game is to be executed. It is possible to suppress the increase in

Game machine K4. In the gaming machine K2 or gaming machine K3, the command generating means stores the first command information and the storage area in both the first game and the second game. A game machine characterized by creating command information by calculating stored game information.

According to this gaming machine, in both the case of the first game and the case of the second game, the command is executed by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the storage area. create information. With such a configuration, when a command is transmitted, the process of determining whether it is the first game or the second game becomes unnecessary, and the amount of data can be reduced by simplifying the processing configuration. It becomes possible.

Game machine K5. In the gaming machine K4, when the command generating means calculates the first game information and the first command information and the first game information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this game machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the calculation result remains the first command information. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine K6. In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first command information is a header.

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as the header, and the first game and the second game are stored in the header. It is possible to include information indicating which one. As a result, it is possible to prevent redundant commands from being transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine K7. In the game machine K6, the game machine is characterized in that the header is stored in 1 byte.

According to this gaming machine, since the header includes information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game, and the header is stored in one byte, when the header is received, the slave control means It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or gaming machine K7, the header comprises a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating a command type, the first game and the second game. a game storage bit for storing information indicating which of the games the game is, and the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit for storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit for storing information indicating the command type, and whether it is the first game or the second game. and a game storage bit for storing information indicating that the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game in a bit that was previously not used. It is possible to suitably suppress redundant commands to be transmitted.

Game machine K9. In the gaming machine K8, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the game storage bits are unused areas.

According to this game machine, the storage area is composed of the same bytes as the header, and the areas other than the positions corresponding to the game storage bits are unused areas. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid changes in the information indicating the command type when creating the header by calculating the first command information and the second game information.

Game machine K10. In any of the game machines K1 to K9, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and the second game information is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that the first signal is not output to the outside of the gaming machine when the first signal is not set.

According to this gaming machine, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output outside the gaming machine, and when the second game information is not stored in the storage area, the second signal is output outside the gaming machine. 1 signal is no longer output. With this configuration, the second game information has a function as information used when creating the second command information, a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine, can be given. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

Game machine K11. In any one of the game machines K1 to K10, the second game is a pseudo game, and the first game is a game other than the pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible for the sub-control means to grasp whether or not it is a pseudo-game through the first command information and the second command information.

Game machine K12. In any one of the game machines K1 to K10, the second game is a game in a specific game state, and the first game is a game in a game state different from the specific game state. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible for the slave control means to grasp whether or not the game is in the specific game state through the first command information and the second command information.

Note that the gaming machine group I to the gaming machine group K may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group I to the game machine group K may be appropriately combined with the game machine group A to the game machine group H, and even if they are combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine L1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (menu screen) based on the fact that a predetermined operation (operation of effect switch 67) is performed,
When the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective when a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is established after the start of the specific effect, and the above-mentioned after the start of the specific effect A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid even if a specific condition is not established.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective when the specific condition is established after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation becomes effective even if the specific condition is not established after the start of the specific performance. Since there is a certain case, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine L2. In the game machine L1, the specific condition includes elapse of a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) after starting the specific effect.

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective after the specific time has passed after the start of the specific effect, and the predetermined operation is performed before the specific time has passed after the start of the specific effect. There are cases where it is effective and others. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

Game machine L3. In the game machine L2, the specific effect is configured to inform the specific result (whether or not there is an addition) until a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) shorter than the specific time elapses. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the specific effect, the specific result is notified until the second specific time shorter than the specific time elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances that the predetermined operation becomes effective before the identification result is notified.

Game machine L4. In the gaming machine L3, when a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is satisfied after the specific effect is started, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. , the gaming machine, wherein the second specific condition includes elapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect.

According to this gaming machine, when the second specific condition including the lapse of the second specific time from the start of the specific effect is satisfied, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. With such a configuration, the specific result is notified regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation becomes effective or the second specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation becomes effective. After that, it becomes possible to validate the predetermined operation.

Game machine L5. In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this game machine, the first operation means is operated not only when the first effect is executed but also when the predetermined information is displayed. In the configuration in which the specific effect is started with the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, it is conceivable that the player may operate the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the effect after notification of the specific result. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to notify the specific result until the second specific time shorter than the specific time elapses, the chance of displaying the predetermined information in a situation unintended by the player is reduced. It becomes possible to

Game machine L6. The game machine L5 is characterized in that the specific time is set to be twice or more the second specific time.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific time is set to be at least twice the second specific time, when the player again operates the first operation means in anticipation of further development of the performance after notification of the specific result. In addition, it is possible to avoid displaying the predetermined information.

Game machine L7. In any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, when the first effect is executed, the elapsed time after the specified condition (operation end command reception) is established is the first specified time (about 10 seconds) after reaching, if the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect becomes the second specified time (about 2 seconds), the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect is longer than the second specified time The prescribed operation becomes valid when the third prescribed time is long (about 5 seconds), and the prescribed condition is satisfied after the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second prescribed time. The predetermined operation is valid when the elapsed time since the specified condition is satisfied is the first specified time, or when the elapsed time after the specified condition is satisfied is the first specified time. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, after the elapsed time from the establishment of the specified condition reaches the first specified time, the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect is the second When the prescribed time is reached, the prescribed operation becomes effective when the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches a third prescribed time longer than the second prescribed time, and the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance. becomes the second specified time and the elapsed time since the specified conditions are met becomes the first specified time, or if the elapsed time after the specified conditions are met becomes the first specified time Predetermined operation becomes effective. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time.

Game machine L8. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the prescribed condition is established when the first effect is started.

According to the game machine, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the relationship between the elapsed time after starting the first effect and the timing when the elapsed time after starting the specific effect becomes the second specified time. changes. Since the specific effect is triggered by the operation of the first operation means, the time required from the start of the first effect until the player operates the first operation means can be It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the time.

Game machine LL1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for shifting to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state),
When the first effect is executed, when a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is established after the start of the specific effect, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state, and after the start of the specific effect. A game machine characterized in that there is a case where the game machine shifts to the customer waiting state even if a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, the state is shifted to the customer waiting state when the specific condition is established after the specific performance is started, and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state even if the specific condition is not established after the specific performance is started. Since there is a case and a certain configuration, it is possible to change the timing of shifting to the customer waiting state, for example, according to the start timing of a specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the configurations described in the game machines L2 to L8 may be appropriately combined after changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state". Even if there is, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Game machine M1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
Sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with a first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means comprises specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect control means (result display processing function) for performing control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) for controlling display of predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the effect switch 67);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the enabling means for validating the subsequent predetermined operation (finishing the pressing effect process and performing S3603 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to shift to

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect is already executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid, so the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid. can be defined by the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine M2. In the game machine M1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the predetermined operation is performed after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second validating means (a function of ending the pressing effect processing based on a second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603).

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is valid after the specific effect has been executed. Become. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command.

Game machine M3. In the game machine M1 or the game machine M2, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, a predetermined effect is set after the specific effect has been executed. After a specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed, a second validation means (a function of terminating the pressing effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that validates the subsequent predetermined operation is provided. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, after the specified time has elapsed after the specific effect has been executed, the subsequent The predetermined operation becomes valid. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command. In addition, by providing a grace period of a prescribed time between when the specific effect is completed and when the predetermined operation becomes effective, the timing when the specific effect is completed, that is, the timing when the first operation means is operated. , the timing at which the specific command is received, and the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective can be changed.

Game machine M4. In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this game machine, the first operation means is operated not only when the first effect is executed but also when the predetermined information is displayed. In the configuration in which the specific effect is started with the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, there is a possibility that the player will operate the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the effect after the specific effect has been executed. Conceivable. Therefore, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes valid is not the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, but the timing at which the specific command is received or after the specified time has passed, so that the predetermined information can be displayed in situations unintended by the player. It is possible to reduce the chance of displaying.

Game machine M5. In the gaming machine M4, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (symbols), and a start operation means (start lever) operated to start the cyclic display of the patterns. 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58), lottery means (lottery processing function of main control unit 101) for performing lottery for a role, and a plurality of switches operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the patterns. The stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) and the winning symbols corresponding to the winning combination won in the lottery of the aforementioned combination form a predetermined combination (combination of small combination symbols, etc.) at the effective position (effective line). privilege giving means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control unit 101) for giving a privilege to the player as a win based on the stoppage, and the predetermined information control means controls at least the cyclic display means. A game machine characterized by performing control to display the predetermined information when all the patterns stop cyclic display.

According to this gaming machine, the above-described effects can be achieved in a slot machine capable of displaying predetermined information in a state where a game is not started.

Game machine M6. In the game machine M5, the main control means provides an operation end command for transmitting an operation end command to the slave control means when all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed. A gaming machine comprising transmission means (operation end command transmission function S3307), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on reception of the operation end command.

According to this game machine, the first effect is executed when all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are finished. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases in which control is performed to execute a specific effect and in which control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is validated, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the malfunction. becomes possible.

Game machine M7. In the game machine M6, when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) elapses after all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed, A gaming machine characterized by transmitting the specific command.

According to this game machine, when the predetermined specific time has passed after all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the patterns are completed, the specific command is transmitted. With this configuration, the elapsed time after all the operations of the stop operation means for stopping the cyclic display of the pattern are completed, and the timing when the specific effect is completed, that is, the first operation means is operated. It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation is effective depending on the timing.

Game machine M8. In the game machine M5, the main control means includes a circulation end command transmission means (all A gaming machine comprising a reel stop completion command transmission function (S3305), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on reception of the circulation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when the cyclic display of all patterns is stopped. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases in which control is performed to execute a specific effect and in which control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is validated, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the malfunction. becomes possible.

Game machine M9. In the game machine M8, the specific command transmission means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (about 10 seconds) has passed after all of the cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined specific time has elapsed after the cyclic display of all patterns has stopped, the specific command is transmitted. With such a configuration, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective is determined by the elapsed time after the completion of the cyclic display of all the patterns and the timing at which the specific effect is completed, that is, the timing at which the first operation means is operated. can be changed.

Game machine MM1. a main control means (main control device 101) for overall management of games;
Sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine provided with a first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means comprises specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means
A first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect control means (result display processing function) for performing control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Transition control means (standby processing function S3607) that performs control to shift to the customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, transition enabling means (pressing effect processing) for enabling the transition to the customer waiting state after that and a function to move to S3603).

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has been executed when the specific command is received, the transition to the customer waiting state is possible after that, so the transition to the customer waiting state is made. It is possible to prescribe the timing of the command by the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine MM2. In the gaming machine MM1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the customer waiting state is entered after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transition enabling means (a function of ending the depression effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) for enabling the transition.

According to this game machine, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. become a thing. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the first operation means is operated after receiving the specific command.

It should be noted that the configuration described in the game machines M3 to M9 is changed from the description of "enable the subsequent predetermined operation" to "enable the transition to the customer waiting state after that". They may be appropriately combined after being changed, and even when they are combined, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Game machine N1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
Predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for displaying predetermined information (menu screen) based on the fact that a predetermined operation (operation of effect switch 67) is performed,
When the first effect is executed, when the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and based on the value of the second timer operated after the start of the specific effect A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to display the predetermined information by performing the predetermined operation even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of an event in which the given information is not displayed even if the given operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chances of the player feeling frustrated.

Further, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and the predetermined operation is performed based on the value of the second timer that is operated after the start of the specific effect. Since there is a case where the operation is effective, the timing at which the predetermined operation is effective can be changed according to, for example, the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances that the predetermined information can be displayed at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine N2. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it comprises operating means (first timer operating function S3505) for operating the first timer when the first effect is started.

According to this game machine, the first timer is activated when the first effect is started. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective based on the elapsed time after starting the first effect, and the time elapsed after starting the specific effect. Based on this, it is possible to have a configuration in which the predetermined operation is valid.

Game machine N3. In the game machine N1 or the game machine N2, a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether or not the value of the first timer is a specified value (0); Execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether or not it has become, and when the value of the first timer becomes the specified value after the specific effect has been executed, the predetermined A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that an operation is effective.

According to this game machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific effect has been executed, the predetermined operation becomes effective. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. , it is possible to reduce the chance that the first effect and the specific effect are delayed.

Game machine N4. In the gaming machine N3, when the specific effect has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, or when the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value (0). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that the predetermined operation is effective immediately.

According to this gaming machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value and the specific effect has not been executed, the predetermined operation is valid when the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value. Become. With this configuration, when the first operating means is operated so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific effect is executed according to the operation timing of the first operating means. After the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, the first operation means is operated so that the specific effect is completed. In this case, it is possible to keep the length of time from when the specific effect is completed until the predetermined operation becomes effective.

Game machine N5. The gaming machine N4, wherein the gaming machine further comprises second operating means (second timer operating function S4212) for operating the second timer when the specific effect has been executed.

According to this game machine, since the second timer is activated when the specific effect is completed, the length from when the specific effect is completed until the predetermined operation becomes effective is constant. It becomes possible to

Game machine N6. In the gaming machine N5, the second operating means does not operate the second timer when the specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific effect is executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer is not operated, and the specified value is specified after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. When the performance has been executed, the second timer is activated. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. does not operate, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Game machine N7. In any one of the gaming machines N3 to N6, the gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this game machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. can be configured so as not to operate.

Game machine N8. The game machine N1 is characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer is operating.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer is configured not to operate when the first timer is operating, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective while simplifying the processing configuration. .

Game machine N9. In the gaming machine N8, confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether or not the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific effect has been executed; and second operating means for operating the second timer when confirming means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, it is checked whether or not the value of the first timer is the specified value when the specific effect has been executed, and if the value of the first timer is the specified value, the second timer works. By adopting such a configuration, the first timer is operated until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific performance is completed. It becomes possible to operate the second timer at the timing.

Game machine N10. In the game machine N9, the game machine is characterized in that the operation of the first timer is terminated when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this game machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer is activated when the predetermined operation is valid based on the value of the second timer. can be configured so as not to operate.

Game machine NN1. A first operation means (production switch 67) operable by the player;
First effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a first effect (press display) prompting the operation of the first operation means;
Specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after the execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) for shifting to a customer waiting state (customer waiting effect display state),
When the first effect is executed, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and based on the value of the second timer which is operated after the start of the specific effect A game machine characterized by having a case where it shifts to said customer waiting state.

According to this game machine, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state even when the first effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event not shifting to the customer waiting state when the first effect is executed.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, the customer waiting state is shifted to the customer waiting state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific effect, and the customer Since there is a case of transitioning to the waiting state, it is possible to change the timing of transitioning to the customer waiting state, for example, according to the start timing of the specific effect.

As a result of the above, it is possible to increase the chances of being able to shift to the customer waiting state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the configurations described in the game machines N2 to N10 may be combined as appropriate after changing the description "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state". Even if there is, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Note that the game machine group L to the game machine group N may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be achieved. Also, the game machine group A to the game machine group K may be appropriately combined with the game machine group L to the game machine N group.

Game machine O1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
a first termination means (advantageous section termination functions S1703 to S1705 of the main controller 101) for terminating the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state when the first termination condition (the difference in the number of sheets is 2400) is met;
Second termination means for terminating the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is established. (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101);
A control means (display control device 81) for controlling to display an end screen notifying that the advantageous state ends,
When the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the control means performs control to display the end screen in the next game round after the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O2. In the gaming machine O1, the first end condition is established when the difference number of sheets from the base point when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of sheets (2400 sheets). A game machine characterized by

According to this game machine, when the number of game media decreases the most in an advantageous state as a base point, and if the difference number from the base point reaches the upper limit number, the game ends in the next game round after the difference number reaches the upper limit number. A screen appears. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. This is because the game round in which the condition is satisfied may be shifted, and an event may occur in which the end screen is displayed over a plurality of game rounds under the situation where the advantageous state has not ended.

Game machine O3. The gaming machine O2 is provided with difference number confirmation means (difference number confirmation function S4511 of the main controller 101) for confirming the difference number, and the difference number confirmation means reaches a specified number (2200) which is less than the upper limit number. A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the first end condition is satisfied in a subsequent game round, the advantageous state ends.

According to this game machine, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number of coins, which is less than the upper limit number of coins, has been reached, the first end condition is established in the subsequent game round, and the advantageous state ends. By adopting such a configuration, the player can play the game in an advantageous state with the goal that the difference number reaches the specified number. As a result, even in the case of setting an upper limit to the difference number in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play. Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to grasp in advance that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. 1. It is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects until the end condition is satisfied.

Game machine O4. In the gaming machine O3, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number has been reached, control is performed to execute a continuous auxiliary effect (ending image) that continues until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by comprising a continuation assistance effect control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of a display control device 81).

According to this game machine, when the difference number confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number has been reached, the continuation assistance performance is executed until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends by means of the continuous assist effect, and the player waits until the first end condition is actually satisfied. can be played while being immersed in a sense of superiority. In addition, since the end screen is displayed in the game round next to the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, the player can play the next game round while enjoying the afterglow. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when a condition for ending the second game mode is established, the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, etc., and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine O6. In the gaming machine O5, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the end screen is displayed before the game cycle for which the second end condition is satisfied is finished. A game machine characterized by

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the end screen is displayed before the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the end of the game round. This is because it becomes impossible to sufficiently secure the time for displaying .

Game machine O7. In the game machine O5 or the game machine O6, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one cyclic display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied causes the pattern to be cyclically displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is displayed under a situation in which the game machine is not stopped.

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one of the cyclic display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied does not stop the cyclic display of the pattern. The end screen will be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the end screen that has been prepared with great effort from being wasted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the cyclic display means have stopped the cyclic display of the patterns. This is because if the operation means is operated, the time for displaying the end screen cannot be sufficiently secured.

Game machine O8. Any one of the game machines O5 to O7 is provided with number information storage means (transition game number counter) for storing number information relating to the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, and corresponds to the number information. A game machine characterized in that a condition for ending the second game mode is satisfied when a game is played a number of times.

According to this gaming machine, when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, the end condition of the second game mode is established. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the second game mode and the advantageous state have not ended.

Game machine O9. In the gaming machine O8, increasing lottery means (additional lottery processing function S4403 of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode; a winning notification means (revival performance in an auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery.

Game machine O10. In any one of the game machines O1 to O9, when the second game mode is shifted to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. Amusement machine.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine P1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
A game characterized in that, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, an end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. machine.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine P2. In the game machine P1, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the transition determination means is the first game mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until a game round is determined to shift to the mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game cycle in the normal state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects that are executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P3. The gaming machine P2 is characterized by comprising a number-of-games informing means (continuous game number display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for informing the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game mode, the number of games played in the first game mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played under the first game mode is not the same, so the number of games cannot be reported or updated under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the players may think that the games under normal conditions are meaningless and lose their desire to play. . However, in the case where the end screen is continuously displayed at each game round in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played under the first game mode, so that there is no discomfort in appearance. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine P4. In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the transition is performed. The judging means is characterized in that a ratio of judging that the normal state is shifted to the first game mode is higher than a ratio of judging that the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode. game machine.

According to this game machine, the ratio of determining to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is higher than the ratio of determining not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the player stays in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen in the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary performances executed in the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity. Further, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or the gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, and the player ends the game with the end screen displayed. It is possible to reduce the chances of being lost.

Game machine P5. In any one of the game machines P1 to P4, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of difference displayed in the above is configured so as not to reflect the game result in the normal state.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state to when the advantageous state ends. The game result in the normal state is not reflected in the number of difference displayed on the end screen. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of game media acquired by the player in an advantageous state even when the end screen is displayed in the normal state. In addition, since processing for updating the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P6. In any one of the game machines P1 to P5, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode, and the transition determination Advantageous information informing means (suggestive orb and confirmed orb display function of auxiliary display section 65) for informing the player of advantageous information that is advantageous to the player when the means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode, advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game in the normal state.

Game machine P7. In the gaming machine P6, the advantageous information notifying means is configured such that all of the plurality of cyclic display means are capable of circulating the pattern in a game turn in which the transition determining means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. The game machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is displayed before all of the plurality of circulating display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern in the game round in which the shift determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern, the notification is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for a player who wants to confirm advantageous information to play a game under a normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating due to the normal state.

Game machine P8. In the game machine P6 or the game machine P7, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is notified based on the number of times the normal state continues. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the normal state does not shift to the first game mode. Further, when this configuration is applied to the configuration related to the gaming machine P2, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal state. If the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. This is because it is possible to have the player hold the player and to direct the player's attention to the advantageous information.

Game machine P9. Any one of the game machines P1 to P8 is characterized by comprising end screen control means (display control device 81) for performing control to display the end screen in a game turn in which the second game mode ends. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen may be displayed in the game round when the second game mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will perceive the normal state. .

Game machine P10. In the gaming machine P9, an increase lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. a processing function S4403), and winning notification means (resurrection effect in the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating. For example, when a predetermined player ends the game with the end screen displayed, the start operation means is operated to start the next game round while making the other players expect the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to

Game machine P11. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, when the first ending condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is established, the first ending means (of the main controller 101) for ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state Advantageous section end functions (S1703 to S1705) and a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) are established, the advantageous state is ended. A second termination means (advantageous section termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101) for shifting to the normal state, and a control means (display control device 81), wherein, when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the game round following the game round in which the first end condition is met. and, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the game machine performs control to display the end screen in the game cycle in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine Q1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns (designs);
start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery for a role;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
When the winning combination won in the lottery for the above combination and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor combination patterns) at the effective position (effective line) and stop, the player is informed that a prize has been won. In a gaming machine provided with privilege granting means for granting a privilege (medal payout processing S213 of main controller 101, etc.),
As a game state, there are an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) can operate, and a normal state (normal interval), and
The advantageous state has a first game mode (chance mode) and a second game mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
Transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first game mode;
Advantageous information notification means for informing the player of advantageous information (suggestion orb of auxiliary display unit 65, fixed orb display function) when the transition determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this game machine, when the normal state is not shifted to the first game mode, advantageous information that is advantageous to the player is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding the game in the normal state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine Q2. In the gaming machine Q1, the advantageous information notifying means is configured so that all of the plurality of circulating display means can circulate the pattern in a game turn in which the transition determining means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. The game machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the patterns.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is displayed before all of the plurality of circulating display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern in the game round in which the shift determination means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of cyclic display means stop the cyclic display of the pattern, the notification is stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible for a player who wants to confirm advantageous information to play a game under a normal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating due to the normal state.

Game machine Q3. In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the advantageous information notification means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is notified based on the number of times the normal state continues. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's willingness to play when the normal state does not shift to the first game mode.

Game machine Q4. In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, when the second game mode is shifted to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed in the first game of the normal state. A game machine characterized by having a configuration in which is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, the end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while being immersed in the afterglow. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Game machine Q5. In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until a game turn in which the transition determining means determines to shift to the first game mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game cycle in the normal state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of assist effects that are executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, if the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game may become monotonous under normal conditions. However, in the configuration in which the advantageous information is reported when the normal state continues, it is possible to make the player have expectations that, for example, the next game may be reported with different advantageous information from the current one. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the advantageous information. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine Q6. The game machine Q5 is characterized in that it comprises a number-of-games informing means (continuous game number display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for informing the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game mode, the number of games played in the first game mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played under the first game mode is not the same, so the number of games cannot be reported or updated under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, it is possible that the players may think that the games under normal conditions are meaningless and lose their desire to play. . However, in the case where the end screen is continuously displayed at each game round in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played under the first game mode, so that there is no discomfort in appearance. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to preferably solve the above concerns.

Game machine Q7. In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of difference displayed in the above is configured so as not to reflect the game result in the normal state.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state to when the advantageous state ends. The game result in the normal state is not reflected in the number of difference displayed on the end screen. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the number of game media acquired by the player in an advantageous state even when the end screen is displayed in the normal state. In addition, since processing for updating the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen is not required, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine Q8. In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q7, the ratio of determining that the transition determination means is to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than a judging ratio.

According to this game machine, the ratio of determining to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is higher than the ratio of determining not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game is played while staying in the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing the game in the normal state. In addition, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine Q5, it is possible to reduce the chances of the end screen being continuously displayed for a long period of time, thereby reducing the chances that the player ends the game with the end screen displayed. can be reduced.

Game machine Q9. Any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8 is characterized by comprising end screen control means (display control device 81) for performing control to display the end screen in the game round in which the second game mode ends. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen may be displayed in the game round when the second game mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will perceive the normal state. .

Game machine Q10. In the gaming machine Q9, an increase lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) for performing an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode a processing function S4403), and winning notification means (resurrection effect in the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when an increase lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery is won in the game round following the game round in which the end screen is displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed, the start operation means can be operated to start the next game round while expecting the continuation of the second game mode, thereby improving the game interest. It becomes possible to plan In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is visually recognized by the player in the game round in which the conditions for ending the second game mode are satisfied, and then the increase in the number of times the game can be played under the second game mode is notified. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the satisfaction of having won the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to the configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from deteriorating. For example, when a predetermined player ends the game with the end screen displayed, the start operation means is operated to start the next game round while making the other players expect the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to

Game machine Q11. In any of the game machines Q1 to Q8, when the first end condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is established, the first end means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end functions (S1703 to S1705) and a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) are established, the advantageous state is ended. A second termination means (advantageous section termination functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101) for shifting to the normal state, and a control means (display control device 81), wherein, when the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the game round following the game round in which the first end condition is met. and, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the game machine performs control to display the end screen in the game cycle in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this game machine, there are a first end condition and a second end condition as end conditions for ending the advantageous state, and when the first end condition is established and the advantageous state is ended, the first end condition is established. Control is performed to display the end screen in the game round following the game round, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. will be In this way, by varying the game cycle in which the end screen is displayed depending on which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effect such as executing an auxiliary effect according to the end condition that is satisfied. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the O group of gaming machines to the Q group of gaming machines may be combined as appropriate, and even when they are combined, the above effects can be obtained. Also, the game machine group A to the game machine group N may be appropriately combined with the game machine group O to the game machine group Q, and even in the case of the combination, the above effects can be achieved.

10... A slot machine as a game machine, 32... A reel as a circulation display means and a revolving body, 41... A start operation means or a start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44... A stop switch as a stop operation means, 56... First credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57... Second credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58... Third credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means , 63 . Display control device constituting a sub control board or specific effect execution means, 101 Main control device as a main control board, 102 CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (5)

a plurality of cyclic display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of patterns;
a start operation means operated to start the cyclic display of the pattern;
A lottery means for lottery for roles;
a plurality of stop operation means operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the pattern;
A game provided with privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player as winning establishment based on the fact that the winning combination won in the lottery of the said role and the corresponding winning pattern form a predetermined combination at the valid position and stop. on the machine,
As game states, there are an advantageous state in which an instruction function for notifying an operation method for establishing a specific prize can be activated, and a normal state in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first game mode and a second game mode in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first game mode,
A game characterized in that, when shifting from the second game mode to the normal state, an end screen for notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed at the first game in the normal state. machine. A transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the end screen is continuously displayed until a game round when the transition determining means determines to shift to the first game mode. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, characterized in that it is configured as follows. 3. The game machine according to claim 2, further comprising game number reporting means for reporting the number of games played in the first game mode. A transition determination means for determining whether to transition from the normal state to the first game mode is provided, and the transition determination means determines that the normal state is shifted to the first game mode. 4. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the ratio is higher than the ratio of determining not to shift from the state to the first game mode. The end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media is the lowest in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. 5. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured so that the result is not reflected.

Images